Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape Awd
Engine and year
V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0010
For diagnosis of code P0010 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 9
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 10
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0011
For diagnosis of code P0011 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 11
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 12
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0012
For diagnosis of code P0012 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 13
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 14
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0013
For diagnosis of code P0013 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 15
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0020
For diagnosis of code P0020 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 20
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 21
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0021
For diagnosis of code P0021 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 22
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 23
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0022
For diagnosis of code P0022 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 24
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040
P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0040
For diagnosis of code P0040 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 29
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 30
P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0041
For diagnosis of code P0041 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 31
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053
P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0053
For diagnosis of code P0053 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 36
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 37
P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0054
For diagnosis of code P0054 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 38
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059,
( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055
P0055 - P0059: Testing and Inspection P0055
For diagnosis of code P0055 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059,
( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 43
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059,
( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 44
P0055 - P0059: Testing and Inspection P0059
For diagnosis of code P0059 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059,
( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0055 > Page 45
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060
P0060 - P0064: Testing and Inspection P0060
For diagnosis of code P0060 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 50
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 51
P0060 - P0064: Testing and Inspection P0061
For diagnosis of code P0061 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0060 > Page 52
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069,
( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0065 - P0069: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0068 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069,
( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 56
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102
For diagnosis of code P0102 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 62
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 63
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0103
For diagnosis of code P0103 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 64
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 65
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0104
For diagnosis of code P0104 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 66
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0106
For diagnosis of code P0106 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 71
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 72
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 73
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 74
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 75
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 76
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0108
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 77
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 78
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 79
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 80
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0109
For diagnosis of code P0109 refer to chart
Bxxxx / C172x-Cxxxx / P0010-P0109
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 81
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0112
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 86
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart:
P0112-P0147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 87
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 88
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0113
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 89
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart:
P0112-P0147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 90
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 91
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0114
For diagnosis of code P0114 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 92
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116
For diagnosis of code P0116 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 97
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 98
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0117
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 99
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart:
P0112-P0147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 100
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 101
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 102
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to the Base Gasoline Diagnostic Chart:
P0112-P0147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 103
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 104
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0119
For diagnosis of code P0119 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 105
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121
For diagnosis of code P0121 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 110
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 111
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0122
For diagnosis of code P0122 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 112
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 113
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123
For diagnosis of code P0123 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 114
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0125
For diagnosis of code P0125 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 119
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 120
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0127
For diagnosis of code P0127 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 121
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 122
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0128
For diagnosis of code P0128 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 123
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0131
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 128
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 129
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 130
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 131
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0132
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0132 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 132
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0132 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 133
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 134
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 135
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0133
For diagnosis of code P0133 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 136
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 137
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0134
For diagnosis of code P0134 refer to chart
P0107-P0193
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 138
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0135
For diagnosis of code P0135 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 143
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 144
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0136
For diagnosis of code P0136 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 145
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 146
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0138
For diagnosis of code P0138 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 147
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141
P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection P0141
For diagnosis of code P0141 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 152
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 153
P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection P0144
For diagnosis of code P0144 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0141 > Page 154
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147
P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection P0147
For diagnosis of code P0147 refer to chart
P0112-P0147
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 159
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 160
P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection P0148
For diagnosis of code P0148 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0147 > Page 161
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0151
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 166
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 167
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 168
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 169
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0152
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0152 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 170
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0152 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 171
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 172
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 173
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0153
For diagnosis of code P0153 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 174
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 175
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0154
For diagnosis of code P0154 refer to chart
P0107-P0193
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 176
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0155
For diagnosis of code P0155 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 181
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 182
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0156
For diagnosis of code P0156 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 183
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 184
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0158
For diagnosis of code P0158 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 185
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0160 - P0164: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0161 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0165 - P0169,
( P0166 P0167 P0168 0165 0166 0167 0168 0169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0165 - P0169: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0167 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0171
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 196
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 197
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 198
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 199
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0172
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 200
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 201
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 202
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 203
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0174
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 204
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 205
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 206
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline
P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline >
Page 211
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline >
Page 212
P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart
P0107-P0193
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > OBD II - Base Gasoline >
Page 213
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180
For diagnosis of code P0180 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 218
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 219
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0181
For diagnosis of code P0181 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 220
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 221
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0182
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 222
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 223
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 224
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 225
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 226
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0183
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 227
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 228
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 229
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 230
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0190
For diagnosis of code P0190 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 235
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 236
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191
For diagnosis of code P0191 refer to chart
P0148-P0191
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 237
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 238
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0192
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 239
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 240
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 241
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 242
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 243
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0193
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 244
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 245
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 246
P0107-P0193
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 247
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0196
For diagnosis of code P0196 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 252
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 253
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0197
For diagnosis of code P0197 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 254
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 255
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0198
For diagnosis of code P0198 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 256
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0201
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 262
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 263
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 264
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0202
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 265
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 266
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 267
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0203
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 268
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 269
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 270
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0204
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 271
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 272
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0205
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 277
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 278
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 279
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0206
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 280
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 281
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 282
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0207
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 283
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 284
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 285
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0208
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 286
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 287
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 288
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0209
For diagnosis of code P0209 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 289
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0210
For diagnosis of code P0210 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 294
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 295
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0211
For diagnosis of code P0211 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 296
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 297
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0212
For diagnosis of code P0212 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 298
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217
P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection P0217
For diagnosis of code P0217 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 303
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 304
P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection P0219
For diagnosis of code P0219 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0217 > Page 305
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0221
For diagnosis of code P0221 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 310
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 311
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0222
For diagnosis of code P0222 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 312
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 313
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0223
For diagnosis of code P0223 refer to chart
P0192-P0223
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 314
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0230
For diagnosis of code P0230 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 319
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 320
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0231
For diagnosis of code P0231 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 321
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 322
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232
For diagnosis of code P0232 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 323
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 324
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0234
For diagnosis of code P0234 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 325
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0235 - P0239,
( P0236 P0237 P0238 0235 0236 0237 0238 0239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0235 - P0239: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0237 refer to chart
Part 1
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244,
( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0240 - P0244: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0243 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0240 - P0244,
( P0241 P0242 P0243 0240 0241 0242 0243 0244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 332
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261
P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0261
For diagnosis of code P0261 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 337
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 338
P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0262
For diagnosis of code P0262 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 339
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 340
P0260 - P0264: Testing and Inspection P0264
For diagnosis of code P0264 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0260 - P0264,
( P0261 P0262 P0263 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0261 > Page 341
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265
P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0265
For diagnosis of code P0265 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 346
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 347
P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0267
For diagnosis of code P0267 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 348
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 349
P0265 - P0269: Testing and Inspection P0268
For diagnosis of code P0268 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0265 - P0269,
( P0266 P0267 P0268 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0265 > Page 350
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270
P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0270
For diagnosis of code P0270 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 355
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 356
P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0271
For diagnosis of code P0271 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 357
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 358
P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0273
For diagnosis of code P0273 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 359
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 360
P0270 - P0274: Testing and Inspection P0274
For diagnosis of code P0274 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0270 - P0274,
( P0271 P0272 P0273 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0270 > Page 361
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276
P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0276
For diagnosis of code P0276 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 366
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 367
P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0277
For diagnosis of code P0277 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 368
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 369
P0275 - P0279: Testing and Inspection P0279
For diagnosis of code P0279 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0275 - P0279,
( P0276 P0277 P0278 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0276 > Page 370
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280
P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0280
For diagnosis of code P0280 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 375
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 376
P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0282
For diagnosis of code P0282 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 377
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 378
P0280 - P0284: Testing and Inspection P0283
For diagnosis of code P0283 refer to chart
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0280 - P0284,
( P0281 P0282 P0283 0280 0281 0282 0283 0284 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0280 > Page 379
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0297
For diagnosis of code P0297 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 384
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 385
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0298
For diagnosis of code P0298 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 386
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P030x
For diagnosis of code P030x refer to chart
P0230-P0360
NOTE: "x" equals any number 0 through 9 or letter A through F.
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 392
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 393
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0300
For diagnosis of code P0300 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P030x > Page 394
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0310 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 398
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315
P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0315
For diagnosis of code P0315 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 403
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 404
P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0316
For diagnosis of code P0316 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 405
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0320 - P0324: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0320 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 409
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0325
For diagnosis of code P0325 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 414
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 415
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0326
For diagnosis of code P0326 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 416
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0330
For diagnosis of code P0330 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 421
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 422
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0331
For diagnosis of code P0331 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 423
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0340 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 427
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349,
( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0345 - P0349: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0345 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349,
( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 431
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0350
For diagnosis of code P0350 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 436
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 437
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0351
For diagnosis of code P0351 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 438
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 439
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0352
For diagnosis of code P0352 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 440
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 441
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0353
For diagnosis of code P0353 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 442
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 443
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0354
For diagnosis of code P0354 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 444
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0355
For diagnosis of code P0355 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 449
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 450
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0356
For diagnosis of code P0356 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 451
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 452
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0357
For diagnosis of code P0357 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 453
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 454
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358
For diagnosis of code P0358 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 455
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 456
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0359
For diagnosis of code P0359 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 457
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0360 - P0364: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0360 refer to chart
P0230-P0360
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 461
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0400
For diagnosis of code P0400 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 467
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 468
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0401
For diagnosis of code P0401 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 469
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 470
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0402
For diagnosis of code P0402 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 471
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 472
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0403
For diagnosis of code P0403 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 473
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405
P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0405
For diagnosis of code P0405 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 478
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 479
P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0406
For diagnosis of code P0406 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 480
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0411
For diagnosis of code P0411 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 485
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 486
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412
For diagnosis of code P0412 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 487
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424,
( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0420 - P0424: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0420 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434,
( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0430 - P0434: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0430 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0442
For diagnosis of code P0442 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 498
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P0456
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 499
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0443
For diagnosis of code P0443 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 500
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0445 - P0449,
( P0446 P0447 P0448 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0445 - P0449: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0446 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0451
For diagnosis of code P0451 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 508
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 509
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0452
For diagnosis of code P0452 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 510
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 511
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453
For diagnosis of code P0453 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 512
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 513
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0454
For diagnosis of code P0454 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 514
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0455
For diagnosis of code P0455 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 519
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442-P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 520
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0456
For diagnosis of code P0456 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 521
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P0457
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 522
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0457
For diagnosis of code P0457 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 523
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0460
For diagnosis of code P0460 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 528
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 529
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0461
For diagnosis of code P0461 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 530
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 531
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0462
For diagnosis of code P0462 refer to chart
P0400-P0462
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 532
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 533
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0463
For diagnosis of code P0463 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 534
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0480
For diagnosis of code P0480 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 539
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 540
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0481
For diagnosis of code P0481 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 541
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 542
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0482
For diagnosis of code P0482 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 543
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500
For diagnosis of code P0500 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 549
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 550
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0501
For diagnosis of code P0501 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 551
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 552
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0503
For diagnosis of code P0503 refer to chart
P0463-P0503
NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 553
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0505
For diagnosis of code P0505 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 558
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 559
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0506
For diagnosis of code P0506 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 560
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 561
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0507
For diagnosis of code P0507 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
NOTE 9: Refer to the Description, Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 562
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514,
( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0510 - P0514: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0511 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514,
( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 566
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532
P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0532
For diagnosis of code P0532 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 571
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 572
P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0533
For diagnosis of code P0533 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 573
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 574
P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection P0534
For diagnosis of code P0534 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0532 > Page 575
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537
P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0537
For diagnosis of code P0537 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 580
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 581
P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0538
For diagnosis of code P0538 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 582
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0552
For diagnosis of code P0552 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 587
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 588
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0553
For diagnosis of code P0553 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 589
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0580 - P0584,
( P0581 P0582 P0583 0580 0581 0582 0583 0584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0580 - P0584: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of P0581 refer to chart
DTC Index P0500-P1572
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0602
For diagnosis of code P0602 refer to Note 11:
NOTE 11: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instructions, refer to the Flash
VID Block Procedure.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 598
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0603
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 599
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 600
P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 601
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605
P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0605
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to Note 12:
NOTE 12: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the PCM. If
replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 606
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Note 5: Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is retrieved again, check for aftermarket performance
products before replacing the AFCM.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 607
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 608
P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0606
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P0606 refer to the following:
- Vehicles with Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) refer to NOTE 13.
- All other vehicles refer to NOTE 12.
NOTE 12: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing the PCM. If
replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
NOTE 13: DTC is an indication of a failure mode in the Electronic Throttle Control system, which
includes the APPS, ETB, and PCM. It is accompanied by other DTCs which provide repair
direction. Proceed to Trouble Code Indexes to repair those DTCs, and the P0606 will not be reset.
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P0606 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 609
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
Note 5: Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is retrieved again, check for aftermarket performance
products before replacing the AFCM.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 610
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649,
( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0645 - P0649: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0645 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649,
( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 614
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0655 - P0659,
( P0656 P0657 P0658 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0655 - P0659: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0657 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0655 - P0659,
( P0656 P0657 P0658 0655 0656 0657 0658 0659 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 618
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660
P0660 - P0664: Testing and Inspection P0660
For diagnosis of code P0660 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 623
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 624
P0660 - P0664: Testing and Inspection P0663
For diagnosis of code P0663 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0660 > Page 625
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703
Engine Related Diagnosis
For diagnosis of code P0703 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
NOTE 15: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further
diagnosis of the lighting control module LCM system. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and
released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See:
Lighting and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 631
Horns
NOTE 16: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further
diagnosis of the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released
for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and
Horns
NOTE 17: REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems, for further diagnosis of the cause
of the incorrect brake pedal status from the ABS to the PCM. Make sure the brake pedal was
applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO
self-test. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Cruise Control Related Diagnosis
For diagnosis of code P0703, refer to chart:
P0500-P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Cruise Control system, follow this link: See: Cruise Control/Testing
and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 632
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0704
For diagnosis of code P0704 refer to chart
P0505-P0722
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 633
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0705
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0705 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 638
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0705 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 639
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 640
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0706
For diagnosis of code P0706 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 641
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 642
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0707
For diagnosis of code P0707 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 643
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 644
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 645
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 646
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 647
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0710
For diagnosis of code P0710 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 652
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 653
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0712
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 654
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 655
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 656
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart
Part 3
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 657
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 658
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0713
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 659
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 660
Part 7
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 661
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0710 > Page 662
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0715
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 667
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 668
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 669
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0717
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 670
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 671
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 672
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0718
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 673
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 674
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Manual Transmission
P0720
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0721
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0722
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0723
For diagnosis of code P0723 refer to pinpoint test TJ1. See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Tests TJ: Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 679
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 680
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart
Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 681
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 682
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 683
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 684
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 685
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 686
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 687
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 688
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart
Part 3
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 689
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0730
For diagnosis of code P0730 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 694
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 695
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0731
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart
Part 3
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 696
Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 697
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 698
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0732
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart
Part 4
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 699
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 700
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 701
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0733
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart
Part 4
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 702
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 703
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 704
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0734
For diagnosis of code P0734 refer to chart
Part 4
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0730 > Page 705
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0740
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 710
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 711
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 712
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 713
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 714
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0741
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 715
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart
Part 3
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 716
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 717
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 718
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0742
For diagnosis of code P0742 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 719
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 720
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0743
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 721
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart
Part 3
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 722
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 723
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 724
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0744
For diagnosis of code P0744 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 725
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749,
( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W
P0745 - P0749: Testing and Inspection 4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0748 refer to chart
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749,
( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 730
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749,
( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 731
P0745 - P0749: Testing and Inspection Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0748 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0745 - P0749,
( P0746 P0747 P0748 0745 0746 0747 0748 0749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 732
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0750
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 737
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart
Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 738
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 739
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 740
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0752
For diagnosis of code P0752 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 741
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 742
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0753
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 743
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 744
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 745
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0755
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 750
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 751
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 752
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 753
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0757
For diagnosis of code P0757 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 754
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 755
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0758
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 756
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 757
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 758
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0760 - P0764,
( P0761 P0762 P0763 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0760 - P0764: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0762 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0760 - P0764,
( P0761 P0762 P0763 0760 0761 0762 0763 0764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 762
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769,
( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766
P0765 - P0769: Testing and Inspection P0766
For diagnosis of code P0766 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769,
( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 767
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769,
( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 768
P0765 - P0769: Testing and Inspection P0767
For diagnosis of code P0767 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0765 - P0769,
( P0766 P0767 P0768 0765 0766 0767 0768 0769 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0766 > Page 769
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771
P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0771
For diagnosis of code P0771 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 774
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 775
P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0772
For diagnosis of code P0772 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 776
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 777
P0770 - P0774: Testing and Inspection P0773
For diagnosis of code P0773 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0770 - P0774,
( P0771 P0772 P0773 0770 0771 0772 0773 0774 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0771 > Page 778
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781
P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0781
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0781 refer to chart
Part 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 783
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0781 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 784
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 785
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 786
P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0782
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0782 refer to chart
Part 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 787
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0782 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 788
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 789
P0780 - P0784: Testing and Inspection P0783
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0783 refer to chart
Part 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 790
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P0783 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0780 - P0784,
( P0781 P0782 P0783 0780 0781 0782 0783 0784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0781 > Page 791
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0790 - P0794,
( P0791 P0792 P0793 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0790 - P0794: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0793 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0790 - P0794,
( P0791 P0792 P0793 0790 0791 0792 0793 0794 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 795
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0815 - P0819,
( P0816 P0817 P0818 0815 0816 0817 0818 0819 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0815 - P0819: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0815 refer to chart
P0815-P1780
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0840 - P0844,
( P0841 P0842 P0843 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0840 - P0844: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0841 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0840 - P0844,
( P0841 P0842 P0843 0840 0841 0842 0843 0844 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 803
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0845 - P0849,
( P0846 P0847 P0848 0845 0846 0847 0848 0849 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0845 - P0849: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0846 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0845 - P0849,
( P0846 P0847 P0848 0845 0846 0847 0848 0849 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 807
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0870 - P0874,
( P0871 P0872 P0873 0870 0871 0872 0873 0874 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0870 - P0874: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0871 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0870 - P0874,
( P0871 P0872 P0873 0870 0871 0872 0873 0874 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 811
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0875 - P0879,
( P0876 P0877 P0878 0875 0876 0877 0878 0879 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0875 - P0879: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0876 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0875 - P0879,
( P0876 P0877 P0878 0875 0876 0877 0878 0879 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 815
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960
P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0960
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0960 refer to chart
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 821
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0960 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 822
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 823
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 824
P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0962
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0962 refer to chart
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 825
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0962 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 826
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 827
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 828
P0960 - P0964: Testing and Inspection P0963
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P0963 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 829
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P0963 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 830
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0960 - P0964,
( P0961 P0962 P0963 0960 0961 0962 0963 0964 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0960 > Page 831
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972
P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0972
For diagnosis of code P0972 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 836
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 837
P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0973
For diagnosis of code P0973 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 838
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 839
P0970 - P0974: Testing and Inspection P0974
For diagnosis of code P0974 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0970 - P0974,
( P0971 P0972 P0973 0970 0971 0972 0973 0974 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0972 > Page 840
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975
P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0975
For diagnosis of code P0975 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 845
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 846
P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0976
For diagnosis of code P0976 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 847
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 848
P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0977
For diagnosis of code P0977 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 849
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 850
P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0978
For diagnosis of code P0978 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 851
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 852
P0975 - P0979: Testing and Inspection P0979
For diagnosis of code P0979 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0975 - P0979,
( P0976 P0977 P0978 0975 0976 0977 0978 0979 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0975 > Page 853
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980
P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0980
For diagnosis of code P0980 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 858
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 859
P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0981
For diagnosis of code P0981 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 860
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 861
P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0982
For diagnosis of code P0982 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 862
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 863
P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0983
For diagnosis of code P0983 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 864
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 865
P0980 - P0984: Testing and Inspection P0984
For diagnosis of code P0984 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0980 - P0984,
( P0981 P0982 P0983 0980 0981 0982 0983 0984 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0980 > Page 866
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985
P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0985
For diagnosis of code P0985 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 871
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 872
P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0986
For diagnosis of code P0986 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 873
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 874
P0985 - P0989: Testing and Inspection P0988
For diagnosis of code P0988 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0900-P09ZZ > P0985 - P0989,
( P0986 P0987 P0988 0985 0986 0987 0988 0989 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0985 > Page 875
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1000
For diagnosis of code P1000 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
Note 19: DTC P1000 is ignored in the KOEO and KOER self-test. Disregard DTC P1000 and
continue as directed.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 881
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 882
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1001
For diagnosis of code P1001 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 883
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1100
For diagnosis of code P1100 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 889
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 890
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1101
For diagnosis of code P1101 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 891
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112
P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1112
For diagnosis of code P1112 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 896
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 897
P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection P1114
For diagnosis of code P1114 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1112 > Page 898
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1115
For diagnosis of code P1115 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 903
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 904
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1116
For diagnosis of code P1116 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 905
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 906
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1117
For diagnosis of code P1117 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1115 > Page 907
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1120
For diagnosis of code P1120 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 912
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 913
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121
For diagnosis of code P1121 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 914
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 915
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1124
For diagnosis of code P1124 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 916
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1125
For diagnosis of code P1125 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 921
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 922
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1127
For diagnosis of code P1127 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 923
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 924
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1128
For diagnosis of code P1128 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 925
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 926
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1129
For diagnosis of code P1129 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 927
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130
For diagnosis of code P1130 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 932
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 933
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1131
For diagnosis of code P1131 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 934
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 935
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1132
For diagnosis of code P1132 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 936
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1137
For diagnosis of code P1137 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 941
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 942
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1138
For diagnosis of code P1138 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 943
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1150
For diagnosis of code P1150 refer to chart
P0723-P1150
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 948
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 949
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1151
For diagnosis of code P1151 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 950
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 951
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1152
For diagnosis of code P1152 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 952
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1157
For diagnosis of code P1157 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 957
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 958
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1158
For diagnosis of code P1158 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 959
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1168
For diagnosis of code P1168 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 964
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 965
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1169
For diagnosis of code P1169 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 966
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1180
For diagnosis of code P1180 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 971
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 972
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1181
For diagnosis of code P1181 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 973
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 974
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1184
For diagnosis of code P1184 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 975
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1225 - P1229,
( P1226 P1227 P1228 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1225 - P1229: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1229 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1232
For diagnosis of code P1232 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 984
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 985
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1233
For diagnosis of code P1233 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
NOTE 20: Go to Information Bus for REM (Rear Electronics Module) self-test diagnostics. See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 986
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1235
For diagnosis of code P1235 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 991
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 992
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237
For diagnosis of code P1237 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 993
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244,
( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1240 - P1244: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1244 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245
For diagnosis of code P1245 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1001
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1002
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1246
For diagnosis of P1246 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 1003
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Charging System
DTC Index P1246
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Charging System diagnostic information, See: Starting and Charging/Charging
System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1260
For diagnosis of code P1260 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1008
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1009
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1261
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1261 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1010
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1261 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1011
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1012
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1262
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1262 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1013
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1262 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1014
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1015
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1263
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1263 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1016
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1263 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1017
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1018
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection P1264
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1264 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1019
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1264 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1260 > Page 1020
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265
P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1265
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1265 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1025
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1265 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1026
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1027
P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1266
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1266 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1028
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1266 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1029
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1030
P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1267
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1267 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1031
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1267 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1032
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1033
P1265 - P1269: Testing and Inspection P1268
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1268 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1034
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1268 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1265 - P1269,
( P1266 P1267 P1268 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1265 > Page 1035
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1270
For diagnosis of code P1270 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1040
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1041
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1271
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1271 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1042
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1271 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1043
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1044
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1272
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1272 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1045
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1272 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1046
B1219-B1317 / P0182-P1272
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1047
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1273
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1273 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1048
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1273 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1049
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1050
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection P1274
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1274 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1051
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1274 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1270 > Page 1052
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275
P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1275
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1275 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1057
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1275 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1058
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1059
P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1276
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1276 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1060
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1276 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1061
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1062
P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1277
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1277 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1063
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1277 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1064
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1065
P1275 - P1279: Testing and Inspection P1278
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P1278 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1066
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel CNG Only
For diagnosis of code P1278 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1275 - P1279,
( P1276 P1277 P1278 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1275 > Page 1067
P0182-P1273
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285
For diagnosis of code P1285 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1072
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1073
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1288
For diagnosis of code P1288 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1074
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1075
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1289
For diagnosis of code P1289 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 1076
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294,
( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1290 - P1294: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1290 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299,
( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1295 - P1299: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1299 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309,
( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1305 - P1309: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1309 refer to chart
P1151-P1309
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1335 - P1339,
( P1336 P1337 P1338 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1335 - P1339: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1336 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1380
For diagnosis of code P1380 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1094
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1095
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1381
For diagnosis of code P1381 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1096
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1097
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1383
For diagnosis of code P1383 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 1098
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385
P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1385
For diagnosis of code P1385 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1103
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1104
P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1386
For diagnosis of code P1386 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1105
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1106
P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1388
For diagnosis of code P1388 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1385 > Page 1107
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1395 - P1399,
( P1396 P1397 P1398 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1395 - P1399: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1397 refer to NOTE 36:
NOTE 36: Refer to the Charging System and diagnose the charging system concern. See: Starting
and Charging/Charging System/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1400
For diagnosis of code P1400 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1116
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1117
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1401
For diagnosis of code P1401 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 1118
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1405
For diagnosis of code P1405 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1123
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1124
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1406
For diagnosis of code P1406 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1125
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1126
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1408
For diagnosis of code P1408 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1127
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1128
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1409
For diagnosis of code P1409 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 1129
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436
P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1436
For diagnosis of code P1436 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1134
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1135
P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1437
For diagnosis of code P1437 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 1136
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444,
( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1440 - P1444: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1443 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444,
( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1140
Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1451 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1460
For diagnosis of code P1460 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1148
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1149
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1461
For diagnosis of code P1461 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1150
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1151
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1462
For diagnosis of code P1462 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1152
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1153
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1463
For diagnosis of code P1463 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 1154
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469,
( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1469 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474,
( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1470 - P1474: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1474 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1477
For diagnosis of code P1477 refer to chart
P1336-P1477
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1165
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1166
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1479
For diagnosis of code P1479 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 1167
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1485 - P1489,
( P1486 P1487 P1488 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1485 - P1489: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1489 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500
For diagnosis of code P1500 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
NOTE 6: Go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1176
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1177
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502
For diagnosis of code P1502 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
NOTE 8: Vehicle speed information is provided by the anti-lock brake system. Go to Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
NOTE 18: All Automatic Transmissions go to Transmission Control Systems. See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1178
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1179
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1504
For diagnosis of code P1504 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 1180
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1506
For diagnosis of code P1506 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1185
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1186
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1507
For diagnosis of code P1507 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 1187
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512
P1510 - P1514: Testing and Inspection P1512
For diagnosis of code P1512 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1192
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1193
P1510 - P1514: Testing and Inspection P1513
For diagnosis of code P1513 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1510 - P1514,
( P1511 P1512 P1513 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1512 > Page 1194
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1516
For diagnosis of code P1516 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1199
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1200
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1517
For diagnosis of code P1517 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1201
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1202
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1518
For diagnosis of code P1518 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1203
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1204
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1519
For diagnosis of code P1519 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 1205
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1520 - P1524: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1520 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537
P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1537
For diagnosis of code P1537 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1213
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1214
P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1538
For diagnosis of code P1538 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 1215
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1545 - P1549: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1549 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1550 - P1554: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1550 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1565
For diagnosis of P1565 refer to chart
DTC Index P0500 - P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1226
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1566
For diagnosis of P1566 refer to chart
DTC Index P0500 - P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection>
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1227
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1567
For diagnosis of P1567 refer to chart
DTC Index P0500 - P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 1228
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1568
For diagnosis of P1568 refer to chart
DTC Index P0500 - P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Cruise Control diagnostic information, See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis
P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection Engine Related Diagnosis
For diagnosis of code P1572 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis
> Page 1233
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Engine Related Diagnosis
> Page 1234
P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection Cruise Control Related Diagnosis
For diagnosis of code P1572, refer to chart:
P0500-P0703
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Cruise Control system, follow this link: See: Cruise Control/Testing
and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1580 - P1584,
( P1581 P1582 P1583 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1580 - P1584: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1582 refer to NOTE 21:
NOTE 21: See DTC description and causes. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1630 - P1634: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1633 refer to chart
P1479-P1640
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1635
For diagnosis of code P1635 refer to NOTE 21:
NOTE 21: See DTC description and causes. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 1246
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1636
For diagnosis of code P1636 refer to NOTE 22:
NOTE 22: DTC P1636 indicates the PCM has lost communication with the inductive signature chip.
Replace the PCM.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 1247
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639
For diagnosis of code P1639 refer to Note 11:
NOTE 11: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instructions, refer to the Flash
VID Block Procedure.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640
P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection P1640
For diagnosis of code P1640 refer to NOTE 23:
NOTE 23: See Bi-Fuel CNG Models or Bi-Fuel LPG Models Testing for instructions on how to
retrieve DTCs from the secondary module. See P1640 in Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Descriptions for additional information.
- Bi-Fuel CNG Models.
- Bi-Fuel LPG Models.
- Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 > Page 1252
P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection P1641
For diagnosis of code P1641 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1640 > Page 1253
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1650
For diagnosis of code P1650 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1258
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1259
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1651
For diagnosis of code P1651 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 1260
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1700
For diagnosis of code P1700 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1266
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1702
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1267
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1268
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1269
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1270
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1703
For diagnosis of code P1703 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
NOTE 15: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further
diagnosis of the lighting control module LCM system. Make sure the brake pedal was applied and
released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See:
Lighting and Horns
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1271
NOTE 16: REFER to Exterior Lighting component testing in Lighting and Horns for further
diagnosis of the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Make sure the brake pedal was applied and released
for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO self-test. See: Lighting and
Horns
NOTE 17: REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems, for further diagnosis of the cause
of the incorrect brake pedal status from the ABS to the PCM. Make sure the brake pedal was
applied and released for the KOER self-test and the brake pedal was applied for the KOEO
self-test. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1272
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1704
For diagnosis of code P1704 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1700 > Page 1273
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection 4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
Part 2
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1278
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1279
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection 4R100
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1280
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1281
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > 4R70W > Page 1282
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1710
For diagnosis of code P1710 refer to chart
Part 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1287
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1711
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1288
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1289
Part 7
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1290
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1291
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1292
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1713
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1293
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1294
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1295
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1296
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1714
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1297
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1710 > Page 1298
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1715
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart
Part 5
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1303
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1304
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1305
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1718
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1306
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1307
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 1308
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729,
( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1725 - P1729: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1729 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
NOTE 24: Refer to Transfer Case. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Testing and
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1725 - P1729,
( P1726 P1727 P1728 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1312
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1730 - P1734,
( P1731 P1732 P1733 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1730 - P1734: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1731 refer to chart
P0731-P1760
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1730 - P1734,
( P1731 P1732 P1733 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1316
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1740
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1740 refer to chart
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1321
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1740 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1322
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1323
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1744
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1324
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1325
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1326
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1740 > Page 1327
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1746
For diagnosis of code P1746 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1332
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1333
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1747
For diagnosis of code P1747 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 1334
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751
P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection P1751
For diagnosis of code P1751 refer to chart
P0740-P1789
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1339
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1340
P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection P1754
For diagnosis of code P1754 refer to chart
Part 7
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1751 > Page 1341
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1755 - P1759: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1756 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1345
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760
P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection P1760
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart
Part 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1350
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1351
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1352
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1353
P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection P1761
For diagnosis of code P1761 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 9
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1760 > Page 1354
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1780
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to system being tested:
Transmission Control
If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1359
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Engine Control
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1360
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to system being tested:
Transmission Control
If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1361
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Engine Control
If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1362
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1363
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781
For diagnosis of code P1781 refer to system being tested:
Transmission Control
If there is no link in the chart then: -
This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Engine Control
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1364
If there is no link in the chart then: This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1365
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1783
4R70W
For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart
Part 8
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1366
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
4R100
For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1367
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1368
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Torqshift
For diagnosis of code P1783 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 1369
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1788
For diagnosis of code P1788 refer to chart
P0740-P1789
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1374
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1375
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1789
For diagnosis of code P1789 refer to chart
P0740-P1789
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 1376
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1900 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1381
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004,
( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2000 - P2004: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2004 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004,
( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1386
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2005
For diagnosis of code P2005 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1391
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1392
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2006
For diagnosis of code P2006 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1393
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1394
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2007
For diagnosis of code P2007 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1395
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1396
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2008
For diagnosis of code P2008 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 1397
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014,
( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2010 - P2014: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2014 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014,
( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1401
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2015 - P2019: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2019 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1405
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065
P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2065
For diagnosis of code P2065 refer to NOTE 7:
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1410
P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2066
For diagnosis of code P2066 refer to NOTE 7:
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1411
P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2067
For diagnosis of code P2067 refer to NOTE 7:
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2065 - P2069,
( P2066 P2067 P2068 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2065 > Page 1412
P2065 - P2069: Testing and Inspection P2068
For diagnosis of code P2068 refer to NOTE 7:
NOTE 7: Refer to Instrument Panels, Gauges and Warning Indicators, fuel level indicator or Rear
Electronic Module (REM) diagnosis. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070
P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2070
For diagnosis of code P2070 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1417
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1418
P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2071
For diagnosis of code P2071 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1419
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1420
P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2072
For diagnosis of code P2072 refer to NOTE 26:
NOTE 26: Refer to Trouble Code Descriptions - Diagnostic Aids for DTC P2072
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100
P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2100
For diagnosis of code P2100 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1426
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1427
P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2101
For diagnosis of code P2101 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1428
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1429
P2100 - P2104: Testing and Inspection P2104
For diagnosis of code P2104 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2100 - P2104,
( P2101 P2102 P2103 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2100 > Page 1430
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105
P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2105
For diagnosis of code P2105 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1435
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1436
P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2106
For diagnosis of code P2106 refer to chart
P1641-P2106
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1437
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2105 - P2109,
( P2106 P2107 P2108 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2105 > Page 1438
P2105 - P2109: Testing and Inspection P2107
For diagnosis of code P2107 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110
P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2110
For diagnosis of code P2110 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 1443
P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2111
For diagnosis of code P2111 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2110 - P2114,
( P2111 P2112 P2113 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2110 > Page 1444
P2110 - P2114: Testing and Inspection P2112
For diagnosis of code P2112 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121
P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2121
For diagnosis of code P2121 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 1449
P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2122
For diagnosis of code P2122 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2120 - P2124,
( P2121 P2122 P2123 2120 2121 2122 2123 2124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2121 > Page 1450
P2120 - P2124: Testing and Inspection P2123
For diagnosis of code P2123 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126
P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2126
For diagnosis of code P2126 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 1455
P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2127
For diagnosis of code P2127 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2125 - P2129,
( P2126 P2127 P2128 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2126 > Page 1456
P2125 - P2129: Testing and Inspection P2128
For diagnosis of code P2128 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131
P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2131
For diagnosis of code P2131 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 1461
P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2132
For diagnosis of code P2132 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2130 - P2134,
( P2131 P2132 P2133 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2131 > Page 1462
P2130 - P2134: Testing and Inspection P2133
For diagnosis of code P2133 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2135 - P2139,
( P2136 P2137 P2138 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2135 - P2139: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2135 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2195
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P2195 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P2195 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1470
P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1471
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1472
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2196
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P2196 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P2196 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1473
P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1474
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1475
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2197
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P2197 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P2197 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1476
P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1477
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1478
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2198
OBD II - Base Gasoline
For diagnosis of code P2198 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
OBD II - BI-Fuel LPG Only
For diagnosis of code P2198 refer to chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1479
P0603-P2198 / U0309-U2015
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1480
Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257
P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2257
For diagnosis of code P2257 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257 > Page 1486
P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2258
For diagnosis of code P2258 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2270
For diagnosis of code P2270 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1491
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2271
For diagnosis of code P2271 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1492
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2272
For diagnosis of code P2272 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1493
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2273
For diagnosis of code P2273 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1494
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2274
For diagnosis of code P2274 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279,
( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275
P2275 - P2279: Testing and Inspection P2275
For diagnosis of code P2275 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2275 - P2279,
( P2276 P2277 P2278 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2275 > Page 1499
P2275 - P2279: Testing and Inspection P2278
For diagnosis of code P2278 refer to chart
P2107-Pxxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700
P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2700
For diagnosis of code P2700 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1505
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1506
P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2701
For diagnosis of code P2701 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1507
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1508
P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2702
For diagnosis of code P2702 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1509
P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2703
For diagnosis of code P2703 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2700-P27ZZ > P2700 - P2704,
( P2701 P2702 P2703 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2700 > Page 1510
P2700 - P2704: Testing and Inspection P2704
For diagnosis of code P2704 refer to chart
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1517
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1518
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1519
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 1534
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 1540
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1541
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1542
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1543
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 1555
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 1558
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1559
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1560
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1561
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1565
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1566
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the roof opening panel module.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1571
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1572
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module - Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1579
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1580
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1581
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1584
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1585
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1586
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1587
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1588
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1589
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1590
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1595
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1596
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1597
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1598
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1602
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1603
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor
operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
- during engine start-up
- wide open throttle (WOT)
- low engine idle conditions
- excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1604
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1605
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1610
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1611
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1615
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1616
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1617
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1624
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1625
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1626
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1633
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1634
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1635
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1639
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1640
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1641
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1648
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1649
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1650
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1655
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1659
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1663
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1664
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1665
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1670
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1671
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1672
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1673
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1676
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1677
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1678
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1679
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1682
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1683
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1684
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1685
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1693
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1694
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1695
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1696
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1697
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1698
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1699
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1700
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1701
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1702
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1703
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1704
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1705
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1706
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1707
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1708
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1709
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1710
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1711
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1712
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1713
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1714
59-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1715
59-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1716
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1717
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on
driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator
pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces
the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position
sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that
illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine
Soon" light.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is
driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is
17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the
bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the
main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km).
Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore
(approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is
non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate
or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in
the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body
assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass
actuator.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1721
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy
GEN II ETC System
As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy
and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the
drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position
(driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and
transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004
MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1722
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating
action.
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1723
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2
Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Position Sensor Check
Throttle Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1724
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off.
- 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop)
after key-up.
- 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle
= 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle.
- 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle.
- 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is
capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1729
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1730
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1731
View 151-11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 1734
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 1735
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1736
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN).
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
- Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
- Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
- Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
- Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
- Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link.
The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) > Page 1739
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET
Description
All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset.
The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic
information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II
system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults
occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles
The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
- Clears the DTCs.
- Clears the freeze frame data.
- Clears diagnostic monitoring test results.
- Resets status of the OBD II system monitors.
- Sets DTC P1000.
Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM)
Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning
contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described
above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest.
After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It
will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability
and performance.
This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction
manual.
If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the
battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) > Page 1740
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH
EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information
by vehicle when using WDS or NGS.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1744
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1745
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1746
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1751
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1752
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1753
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1757
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1758
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1759
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1764
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1765
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1766
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1771
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1772
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1773
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE
The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
- monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs)
- signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side
Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1782
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1783
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1784
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1790
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1791
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1792
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1797
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1798
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1799
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1804
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1805
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1806
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1816
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1825
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1826
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1827
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1828
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1834
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1835
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1836
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1837
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1838
View 151-38
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1841
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1842
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1843
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1844
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1848
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1849
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1855
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1860
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1863
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1866
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1867
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1868
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 1869
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1873
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1874
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1875
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1876
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1880
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1881
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1882
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1883
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1884
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1885
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 1890
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 1893
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1894
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1895
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 1901
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1906
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1910
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1911
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1916
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1917
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1918
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1921
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1922
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1923
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1926
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1927
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1928
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1929
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front
Sensor Indicator - Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 1930
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear
Sensor Indicator - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1936
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1937
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1938
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1942
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 1948
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 1951
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 1954
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for
vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive
voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is
depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal
position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor
profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal
inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code
P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1955
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1959
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1960
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1964
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away
from your body. In the unlikely event of
an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the steering wheel cover.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1965
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1970
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1971
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
- Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2
The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge
temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET
circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying
resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 1986
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 1989
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C
Pressure Cut-Off Switch
A/C CYCLING SWITCH
AIC Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
- This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C
cycling switch.
- The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
- The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C
clutch field coil.
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
- The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
- This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
- When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
- When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch >
Page 1992
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch >
Page 1993
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input.
When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the
specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable
Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff.
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch >
Page 1994
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR
A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart
Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure
(discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage
signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM
uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch >
Page 1995
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for
all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure
from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 1998
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2003
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2004
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2005
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 2011
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2015
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2016
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2017
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel
pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies
fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump
continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet
maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the
bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial
fill.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2021
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2022
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 2029
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2033
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2034
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2035
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 2041
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2045
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2046
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2050
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2051
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2055
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2056
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2057
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
4. Remove the multifunction switch.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2072
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2073
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2074
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2075
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2079
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2080
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2081
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 2085
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2089
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2090
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 2091
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2095
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2096
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2097
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2101
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module.
Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
- Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 2108
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative
Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 2113
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type
(Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated
type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger
in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an
integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure
48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same
manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer
to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 2114
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure
Sensor
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2118
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2129
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2130
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2131
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 2132
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2135
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2136
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2137
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2138
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the
heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high
power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors
of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster,
which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S
heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not
interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2141
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2142
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 2143
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2147
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 2150
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2151
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2155
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 2158
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 2159
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2166
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2167
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2168
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2172
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2173
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 2174
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 2180
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure
104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2188
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 2191
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2192
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2200
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2201
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2202
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2203
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
2207
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2210
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR
Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2217
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2218
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2221
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset
RESET INSTRUCTIONS
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment.
3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch
(refer to Owner Guide).
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again.
5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Again, check for leaking natural gas.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2222
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2229
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2230
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2231
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2236
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2237
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2238
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2242
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2243
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2244
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2252
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 2258
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 2261
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 2264
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
- The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system
operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2265
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2268
procedure again.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar,
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2269
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2270
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2271
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim
panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2272
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for
proper system operation.
Install the side crash sensor. 1
Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2273
3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2274
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2275
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2276
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of
the steering column.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable.
21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2277
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 2278
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2279
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2286
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2291
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2299
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2305
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch > Page 2308
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2309
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2321
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2322
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2323
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 2328
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 2331
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2332
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2333
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2334
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2335
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2344
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2345
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2346
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2351
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2352
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2357
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2358
View 151-35
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2361
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2362
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2365
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2366
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2367
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2368
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2369
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2370
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2371
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2379
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2380
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2381
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2382
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2392
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2393
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2394
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2395
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2401
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2402
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2403
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2404
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2405
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2406
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top,
then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-).
Caster
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2407
Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the
wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured
in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2410
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2411
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2412
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2413
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary.
Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference.
3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1. If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle. 2. If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 in),
remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 2421
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2422
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order .........................................................................................................................................
................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2437
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2446
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2447
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................ AWSF-32F
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2448
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations
Drive Belt: Locations
With A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2452
Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2453
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec without A/C
Zetec with A/C (Part 1 Of 2)
Zetec with A/C (Part 2 Of 2)
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2454
With A/C
3.0L (4V) with A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) with Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2455
Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to
determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply:
Visual Inspection Chart
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2458
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2459
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
Belt Tensioner - Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause
excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive
belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 2. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
> Page 2462
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt with Tensioner
Water Pump Belt with Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the water pump belt cover.
2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
> Page 2463
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt Without Tensioner
Water Pump Belt without Tensioner
Removal
1. Remove the water pump belt cover.
2. Cut and remove the water pump belt. Discard the belt.
Installation
1. Install the belt on the water pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley.
2. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers, or other metal objects that could cause damage
to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the
belt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the belt on the camshaft pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
> Page 2464
3. Install the water pump belt cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 2476
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative
Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2480
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine Cooling System.
3. Disconnect the five hoses from the thermostat housing and remove the thermostat housing.
4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor from the bypass tube.
5. Remove the bolt, stud, and the bypass tube.
6. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2497
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2498
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2504
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2505
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 2506
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 2507
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT LINES
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Page 2511
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5.
Remove the front bumper cover.
6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and
remove the condenser to evaporator line.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting
..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.)
Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting
............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48
ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt
.................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering
pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt
........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power
steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt
................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch
lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt
..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. Remove the power steering pressure hose.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2517
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
2. Install the power steering pressure hose.
1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt.
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2518
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type ......................................................................................................................... High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 10L (10.5 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2530
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant VC-7-A (in Oregon VC-7-B) or equivalent (yellow-color)
Ford Specification.................................................................................................................................
......................................................WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: The addition of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens Motorcraft
Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
..........................................................................................................................................................
9.5L (10 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2535
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................
......................................................... 2.2L (2.32 qts.)
NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2540
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
..........................................................................................................................................................
SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2545
Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2550
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2551
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 9.5L (10.0 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2554
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2557
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level
check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before
checking.
Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the
vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for
instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid
level should be checked.
Fluid Level Check
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal operating temperatures. 2.
Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With your foot on the brake,
start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time
for each gear to
engage.
4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal and room temperature.
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator
and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of
transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage.
High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission
component damage.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible
damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally
indicated on the fluid level indicator.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2558
If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician.
Fluid Condition Check
NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If
the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with
MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V
specification.
^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check.
^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an
overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure.
^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of
solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator).
If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug
should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If
transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the
transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque
converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and
adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic
tests and adjustments listed must be completed to make sure that the problem has been
eliminated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.3 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2563
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Type......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Refill .....................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 2.95 pts. (1.4L) NOTE: Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16
inch) from the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2568
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
Rear Axle ........................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
POWER TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................................................
............................................. 12 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2573
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............................. SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2574
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair
CAUTION: New transfer case lubricant must be installed any time the transfer case has been
submerged in water.
NOTE: The transfer case is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected
or a repair IS necessary.
1. Remove the drain plug and drain the transfer case.
2. Apply sealant to the drain plug threads and install the plug.
3. CAUTION: Transfer case failure can result if the correct fill procedures are not followed.
NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the transfer case with SAE 75W-140 synthetic gear lubricant.
4. Apply sealant to the fill plug and install the plug.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2579
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil .......................................................................................................................SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Oil XO-5W20-QSP or equivalent Ford specification .............................................
...........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C153-H
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 2584
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2585
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................
.................................................. MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................
............................................................... 2 lb (907 g)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2590
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ Specification
R134a Refrigerant YN-19 ....................................................................................................................
...................................................... WSH-M17B19-A
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION
Refrigerant Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included
with leak detector for handling and operation techniques.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2593
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection
TRACER DYE LEAK DETECTION
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2594
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2595
7. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has
a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
DISCHARGING AND RECOVERY
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant.
2. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2598
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
IDENTIFYING REFRIGERANTS
Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly
from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
- A green "PASS" light emitting diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
- A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
- A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2599
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
HANDLING OF CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANTS
1. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern.
3. NOTE:
- Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
- The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
Remove the suction accumulator/drier.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 2600
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging
station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump,
charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Capacity ......................................................................................................................
............................................................. 9 oz (266 ml)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2605
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C)
...................................................................................................................................................
WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2606
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device. If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container
- Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2607
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
- installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
- installation of a new refrigerant line
- repair of an O-ring seal leak
- repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety
Information
Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15
minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink
water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety
Information > Page 2612
Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the
paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the
battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2615
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2616
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2617
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2618
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise.
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2619
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2620
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2621
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment.
Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the
brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the
adapter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2622
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2628
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2629
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2630
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2631
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2632
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2633
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2639
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2640
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2641
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2642
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2645
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2646
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2647
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2648
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2653
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2654
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2655
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2656
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2659
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2660
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2661
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2662
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2665
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2666
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2667
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2668
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2673
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2674
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2675
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2676
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2679
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2680
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2681
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 2682
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2685
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2686
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2687
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2688
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control
module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom
Charts
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Ford provides no information related to a Oil Change Reminder Lamp for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2703
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information > Description
and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wheels: Service and Repair
Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing
Part 1 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2715
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2716
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2717
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2718
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2719
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint
stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2720
8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin.
11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2721
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing-4WD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2722
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2723
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS
6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2724
7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2725
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring.
^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2726
2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2727
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2728
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2729
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1. Install the bolt. 2. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS
13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2730
15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and
adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel nuts (all wheels) .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2740
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
TSB 06-7-1
04/17/06
NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS
FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape,
Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac
LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart.
ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral
tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make
the vehicle neutral tow capable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2745
ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable.
Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions
are included with the kit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle
- Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 2746
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2750
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM
Overview
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft
(phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT
systems.
- Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine
oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls
cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced
emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the
added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated
the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR
system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve
opening and exhaust valve closing.
Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS
system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L
3V.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft
positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP,
TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the
engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based
on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the
engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2757
cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will
disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC
will also be set when this fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the
flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
Camshaft Bearing: Customer Interest Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
TSB 06-3-5
02/20/06
CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built
prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the
left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only.
ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a
mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft
at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B.
2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and
the valves are fully closed.
3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight.
NOTE
THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO
POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2767
4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L
camshaft cap.
5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply
hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head.
6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9
(inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3).
7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01.
8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr.
Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2768
Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr.
Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs.
2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A267 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
Camshaft Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
TSB 06-3-5
02/20/06
CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built
prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the
left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only.
ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a
mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft
at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B.
2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and
the valves are fully closed.
3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight.
NOTE
THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO
POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2774
4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L
camshaft cap.
5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply
hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head.
6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9
(inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3).
7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01.
8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr.
Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2775
Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr.
Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs.
2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A267 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2776
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft
Journal-to-bearing clearance
Standard
............................................................................................................................................................
0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.0029 inch) Service limit ..............................................................................
............................................................................................. 0.121 mm (0.0047 inch)
Journal diameters (all)
...........................................................................................................................................
26.962-26.936 mm (1.061-1.060 inch)
Journal inside diameter (cap assembled)
........................................................................................................................................
27.012-26.987 mm Bearing inside diameter (all)
........................................................................................................................... 27.012-26.987 mm
(1.063-1.062 inch)
Camshaft Cap bolts .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 10 Nm (89 in.lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
Camshaft
Lobe lift
Intake (primary) ...................................................................................................................................
...................................... 4.79 mm (0.188 inch) Intake (secondary) .....................................................
................................................................................................................ 4.79 mm (0.188 inch)
Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................
...................................... 4.79 mm (0.188 inch) Lobe lift-allowable lift loss ..........................................
....................................................................................................................... 0 mm (0.0 inch)
Valve lift @ zero lash
Intake (primary) ...................................................................................................................................
...................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 inch) Intake (secondary) .....................................................
................................................................................................................ 9.80 mm (0.388 inch)
Exhaust ................................................................................................................................................
...................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 inch)
Camshaft end play ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 0.027-0.190 mm
Standard
............................................................................................................................................................
0.025-0.165 mm (0.001-0.0064 inch) Service limit ..............................................................................
........................................................................................... 0.190 mm (0.00748 inch)
Journal-to-bearing clearance
Standard
............................................................................................................................................................
0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.0029 inch) Service limit ..............................................................................
............................................................................................. 0.121 mm (0.0047 inch)
Journal diameters (all)
...........................................................................................................................................
26.962-26.936 mm (1.061-1.060 inch)
Journal inside diameter (cap assembled)
........................................................................................................................................
27.012-26.987 mm Bearing inside diameter (all)
........................................................................................................................... 27.012-26.987 mm
(1.063-1.062 inch)
Camshaft Cap bolts .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 10 Nm (89 in.lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH
Camshaft: Service and Repair LH
Camshafts LH
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the water pump belt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2782
2. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 inch) past flush of the end of the
camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to
the end of the camshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the water pump drive pulley and discard.
3. Remove the timing drive components.
4. NOTE: To make sure of correct sealing, do not scratch the camshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the camshaft oil seal and discard.
5. Remove the bolts, the camshaft oil seal retainer and discard the press-in-place gasket.
6. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2783
Loosen the LH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise
from the cylinder head and remove the caps.
7. Remove the camshafts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2784
Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder
head. Align the camshafts as shown.
2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps
can occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the
bearing caps and loosely install the bolts.
3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install
the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2785
4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
5. NOTE: Clean and degrease the sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
Install a new press-in-place gasket and install the camshaft oil seal retainer.
6. Install the timing drive components.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using special tools, install a new camshaft oil seal.
8. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 inch) past flush of the camshaft. The
service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of
the camshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2786
Using the special tool, install a new service water pump drive pulley.
9. Install the water pump belt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2787
Camshaft: Service and Repair RH
Camshafts RH
Material
Removal
1. Remove the timing drive components.
2. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions.
Loosen the RH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise
from the cylinder head and remove the caps.
3. Remove the camshafts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2788
Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder
head. Align the camshafts as shown.
2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps
may occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the
bearing caps and loosely install the bolts.
3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install
the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2789
4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 5. Install the timing drive components.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Lash Adjusters
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the camshaft followers.
2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters.
3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore.
Install new lash adjusters if necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. -
Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Roller Followers
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel.
4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly
away from the follower.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2796
6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM
Overview
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft
(phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT
systems.
- Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine
oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls
cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced
emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the
added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated
the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR
system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve
opening and exhaust valve closing.
Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS
system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L
3V.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft
positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP,
TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the
engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based
on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the
engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2800
cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will
disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC
will also be set when this fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the
flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting rod bearings
Clearance to crankshaft
...........................................................................................................................................
0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 inch) Bearing wall thickness (std.) d
.......................................................................................................................................................
1.503 mm (0.059 inch)
Connecting Rod
Piston pin bore diameter
........................................................................................................................................
21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter
..................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm
(2.0872-2.0879 inch) Length (center to center)
.......................................................................................................................................
138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e
Twist
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch)
Side clearance (assembled to crank)
Standard
............................................................................................................................................................
0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit ..............................................................................
....................................................................................... 0.35 mm (0.0013inch) max.
Connecting rod cap bolts
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
.......................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten to .....................................................
................................................................................................................... 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified
total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod
centerline.
d 0.250 mm Undersize-Add 0.125 mm to standard or grade 2 thickness.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting rod bearings
Clearance to crankshaft
...........................................................................................................................................
0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 inch) Bearing wall thickness (std.) d
.......................................................................................................................................................
1.503 mm (0.059 inch)
Connecting Rod
Piston pin bore diameter
........................................................................................................................................
21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch)
Crankshaft bearing bore diameter
......................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm
(2.0872-2.0879 inch)
Length (center to center)
.......................................................................................................................................
138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e
Twist
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend
..........................................................................................................................................................
0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch)
Side clearance (assembled to crank)
Standard
............................................................................................................................................................
0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit ..............................................................................
....................................................................................... 0.35 mm (0.0013inch) max.
Connecting rod cap bolts
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
.......................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten to .....................................................
................................................................................................................... 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.).
e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified
total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod
centerline.
d 0.250 mm Undersize-Add 0.125 mm to standard or grade 2 thickness.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameter
.............................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm
(2.479-2.480 inch) Connecting rod journal diameter
........................................................................................................................... 49.970-49.990 mm
(1.967-1.968 inch) Crankshaft free end play
............................................................................................................................................
0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 inch) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block
........................................................................................................ 0.050 mm (inch) max. (0.001
inch)
Lower Cylinder block bolts and studs
Stage 1: Tighten fasteners 1-8 to
........................................................................................................................................................ 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten fasteners 9-16 to
...................................................................................................................................................... 40
Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Stage 3: Tighten fasteners 1-16 .................................................................................
...................................................................................... 90 degrees. Stage 4: Tighten fasteners
17-22 to
.................................................................................................................................................... 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
Main bearings
Clearance to crankshaft-desired
.......................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.045 mm
(0.0009-0.0017 inch) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable
...................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm
(0.0009-0.0019 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.497
mm (0.0983 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.501
mm (0.0985 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3
................................................................................................................................................... 2.505
mm (0.0986 inch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft
Main bearing journal diameter
.............................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm
(2.479-2.480 inch) Connecting rod journal diameter
........................................................................................................................... 49.970-49.990 mm
(1.967-1.968 inch) Crankshaft free end play
............................................................................................................................................
0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 inch) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block
........................................................................................................ 0.050 mm (inch) max. (0.001
inch)
Lower cylinder block bolts and studs
Stage 1: Tighten fasteners 1-8 to
........................................................................................................................................................ 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Tighten fasteners 9-16 to
...................................................................................................................................................... 40
Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Stage 3: Tighten fasteners 1-16 .................................................................................
...................................................................................... 90 degrees. Stage 4: Tighten fasteners
17-22 to
.................................................................................................................................................... 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.).
Main bearings
Clearance to crankshaft-desired
.......................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.045 mm
(0.0009-0.0017 inch) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable
...................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm
(0.0009-0.0019 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.497
mm (0.0983 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2
.................................................................................................................................................. 2.501
mm (0.0985 inch) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3
................................................................................................................................................... 2.505
mm (0.0986 inch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Raise the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the block heater power cable from the block heater.
4. CAUTION: Do not loosen the block heater retaining screw more than necessary for removal.
Remove the block heater.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the power cable is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components or damage to the cable can occur.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Install the bolt and the washer and tighten in four stages.
Stage 1: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
........................................ 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.). Stage 2: Loosen .........................................................
.............................................................................................................................. 360 degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten to ..............................................................................................................................
.......................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Stage 4: Tighten an additional ...................................
................................................................................................................................ 90 degrees.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2820
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the splash shield.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2821
3. Install the special tool.
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
5. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket
and sealer.
NOTE: Seal surfaces must be free of dirt and oil.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed within four minutes of applying the silicone gasket
and sealer.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface of the crankshaft pulley with clean engine
oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2822
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley.
3. NOTE: Use an appropriate strap wrench to hold the crankshaft pulley.
Install the bolt and the washer and tighten in four stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 2: Loosen 360 degrees.
- Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
4. Install RH front inner splash shield. 5. Install the accessory drive belt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Piston
Piston diameter Coated grade 1
..................................................................................................................................................
88.990-89.010 mm (3.5035-3.5043 inch) Coated grade 2
..................................................................................................................................................
88.998-89.022 mm (3.5039-3.5048 inch) Coated grade 3
..................................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.5043-3.5051 inch) Uncoated grade 1
..........................................................................................................................................
88.970-88.980 mm (3.50275-3.50314 inch) Uncoated grade 2
..........................................................................................................................................
88.978-88.992 mm (3.50306-3.50362 inch) Uncoated grade 3
..........................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.50432-3.50511 inch) Piston-to-bore clearance
.................................................................................................................................... 0.012 to 0.022
mm (0.0005-0.0009 inch) Pin bore diameter (piston)
................................................................................................................................. 21.008-21.012
mm (0.8270-0.8272 inch)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Pin: Specifications
Piston pin bore diameter
............................................................................................................................................
21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 inch) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter
......................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm
(2.0872-2.0879 inch) Length (center to center)
...........................................................................................................................................
138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.438 inch) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) e
Twist ....................................................................................................................................................
............ 0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 inch) Bend .....................................................................
........................................................................................... 0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 inch)
Side clearance (assembled to crank)
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
.................... 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 inch) Service limit .........................................................
.................................................................................................................. 0.35 mm (0.0013inch)
max.
e Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified
total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar, 101.5 mm on each side of rod
centerline.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Ring groove width
Compression (top)
.................................................................................................................................................
1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 inch) Compression (bottom)
...........................................................................................................................................
1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 inch) Oil ring ....................................................................................
.............................................................................. 3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.1203 inch)
Piston pin
Length ..................................................................................................................................................
..................... 60.51-60.08 mm (2.382-2.365 inch) Diameter ...............................................................
......................................................................................................... 21.011-21.013 mm (0.0013
inch) Pin-to-piston clearance
................................................................................................................................ -0.005 to +0.001
mm (0.0001-0.00003 inch)
Pin-to-rod clearance
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
.................. 0.004-0.020 mm (0.0001-0.0007 inch) Service limit .........................................................
........................................................................................................................ 0.035 mm (0.0013
inch)
Piston Ring-To-Groove Clearance
Compression (top)
.................................................................................................................................................
0.040-0.075 mm (0.0015-0.0029 inch) Compression (bottom)
...........................................................................................................................................
0.040-0.085 mm (0.0015-0.0033 inch)
Oil ring .................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................... Snug Fit
Piston ring gap g Compression (top)-gauge diameter
....................................................................................................................... 0.100-0.250 mm
(0.0039-0.0098 inch) Compression (bottom)-gauge diameter
..................................................................................................................... 0.27-0.42 mm
(0.0106-0.0165 inch) Oil ring (steel rail)-gauge diameter
........................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm
(0.0059-0.0255 inch) Compression (top)-service limit
............................................................................................................................................ 0.50 mm
(0.0196 inch) max. Compression (bottom)-service limit
...................................................................................................................................... 0.65 mm
(0.0255 inch) max. Oil ring (steel rail)-service 1imit
........................................................................................................................................... 0.90 mm
(0.0354 inch) max.
g Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 inch) diameter gauge.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Roller Followers
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel.
4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly
away from the follower.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2839
6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH
Valve Cover: Service and Repair LH
Valve Cover LH
Material
Removal
1. Remove the water pump belt cover.
2. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover.
3. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the three LH coil-on-plugs. 1
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2844
3 Remove the coils.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the valve cover studs.
5. Remove the engine lift bracket.
6. Position the power steering hose aside.
- Remove the bolt.
7. Remove the bolts, studs and the LH valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket.
Install a new gasket on the valve cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2845
2. NOTE: Clean the head and the front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before
applying silicone gasket and sealant.
NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying
the sealant.
Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints.
3. Position the valve cover and install the studs and the bolts in the sequence shown.
4. Position the power steering hose and install the bolt.
5. Position the engine lift bracket and install the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2846
6. Connect the wiring harness to the valve cover studs.
7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Install the three LH coil-on-plugs. 1
Position the coils.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the electrical connectors.
8. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover.
9. Install the water pump belt cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2847
Valve Cover: Service and Repair RH
Valve Cover RH
Material
Removal
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the coils.
3. Remove the wiring harness nuts and disconnect the oxygen sensor electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2848
4. Remove the radio ignition interference capacitor.
5. Separate the harness from the center locating pins and position aside.
6. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover.
7. Remove the bolts, studs and the RH valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket.
Install a new valve cover gasket.
2. NOTE: Clean the head and front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before
applying silicone gasket and sealant.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2849
NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying
the sealant.
Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints.
3. Position the valve cover and install the bolt and the studs in the sequence shown.
4. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover.
5. Connect the radio ignition interference capacitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > LH > Page 2850
6. Connect the 02 sensor electrical connectors and wiring harness to the RH valve cover stud.
7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper and grease compound to the interior of the spark plug
boot prior to installation.
Install the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1
Position the coils.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the electrical connectors.
8. Install the upper intake manifold.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Spring: Service and Repair
Valve Spring
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the roller followers.
2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder.
A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
3. Using the special tool, remove the key, retainer, and valve spring. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations
Drive Belt: Locations
With A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2858
Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2859
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Zetec without A/C
2.0L Zetec without A/C
Zetec with A/C (Part 1 Of 2)
Zetec with A/C (Part 2 Of 2)
2.0L Zetec with A/C
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2860
With A/C
3.0L (4V) with A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt with Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) with Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2861
Water Pump Drive Belt without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition. 2. Inspect to
determine if any of the following mechanical concerns apply:
Visual Inspection Chart
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns. Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2864
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2865
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner-Dynamic
Belt Tensioner - Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause
excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive
belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Belt Tensioner-Mechanical
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 2. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2868
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt with Tensioner
Water Pump Belt with Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the water pump belt cover.
2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2869
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt Without Tensioner
Water Pump Belt without Tensioner
Removal
1. Remove the water pump belt cover.
2. Cut and remove the water pump belt. Discard the belt.
Installation
1. Install the belt on the water pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley.
2. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers, or other metal objects that could cause damage
to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the
belt.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the belt on the camshaft pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 2870
3. Install the water pump belt cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner > Page 2875
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Belt Tensioner-Water Pump
Belt Tensioner - Water Pump
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: If equipped with belt tensioner.
Remove the water pump belt.
2. Remove the bolt and the belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
Engine Support Insulators-Front, RH
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the engine ground wire.
2. Using the special tools, support the engine.
3. Remove the A/C line bracket bolt and position the A/C lines out of the way.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2879
4. Remove the engine support insulator bolt.
5. Remove the engine support tool.
1 Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolts and insulator.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 RPM with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling.)
......................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the oil level indicator.
2. Remove the oil level indicator tube.
1 Remove the stud bolt.
2 Remove the oil level indicator tube.
3. Install a new O-ring. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2891
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil .......................................................................................................................SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Oil XO-5W20-QSP or equivalent Ford specification .............................................
...........................................................................................................................................
WSS-M2C153-H
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
Oil Cooler
Material
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the oil pan drain bolt and drain the engine oil.
3. Remove and discard the oil filter.
4. Disconnect the coolant hoses at the cooler.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2895
5. Remove and discard the oil cooler. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new oil cooler.
- Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil pan bolts and studs ........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan Baffle
Removal
1. Remove the oil pump screen cover and tube.
2. Remove the nuts and the oil pan baffle.
Installation
1. Position the oil pan baffle and install the nuts.
- Tighten the nuts in two stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.).
- Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees.
2. Install the oil pump screen cover and tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2901
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Material
Removal
1. Remove the flexible exhaust pipe.
2. Disconnect the downstream catalyst monitor sensor. 3. Drain the oil.
4. Install the drain plug. 5. Remove and discard the oil filter.
6. Remove the 15 bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2902
7. Remove the three bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means
to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket.
1. Clean all sealing surfaces on the engine and the oil pan with metal surface cleaner. 2. Position a
new gasket on the oil pan.
3. NOTE: Clean and decrease all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened with in four minutes of sealant
application.
Apply a 10 mm (0.40 inch) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the areas indicated.
4. Position the oil pan and gasket and loosely install the bolts in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2903
5. Install the oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
6. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown.
7. Lubricate the oil filter O-ring with clean engine oil and install the oil filter. 8. Install the exhaust
flexible exhaust pipe.
9. Connect the downstream catalyst monitor.
10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2907
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2908
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Material Removal
1. Remove the oil pan.
2. Remove the nut, bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2912
2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
1 Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Install the nut. Tighten the nut in two stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 inch lbs.).
- Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees.
3. Install the oil pan.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (Minimum at 1,500 RPM with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling.)
......................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Upper intake manifold bolts .................................................................................................................
................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Lower intake manifold bolts .................................................................................................................
................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper
Upper Intake Manifold
Removal
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
1 Remove the crankcase ventilation tube.
2 Loosen the clamps.
3 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the cables.
1 Disconnect the throttle cable.
2 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable.
3 Remove the throttle cable bracket bolts.
3. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor and idle air control (IAC) electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2925
4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut.
5. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and vacuum hose.
6. Disconnect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the intake manifold.
1 Disconnect the chassis vacuum hose.
2 Disconnect the engine vacuum hose.
3 Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose.
7. Disconnect the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2926
8. Disconnect the two electrical connectors attached to the left side of the upper intake manifold.
9. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) sensor electrical connector.
10. Remove the bolt and position the transmission vent hose and bracket aside.
11. Remove the nut from the wire harness.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2927
12. Remove the eight bolts and the upper intake manifold.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
- Clean all sealing surfaces.
Installation
1. Install new gaskets in the upper intake manifold.
2. Position the upper intake manifold and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
3. Connect the PSP electrical connector.
4. Position the transmission vent tube and bracket and install the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2928
5. Position the wire harness and install the nut.
6. Install the two electrical connectors on the left side of the intake manifold.
7. Install the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose.
8. Connect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the upper intake manifold.
1 Connect the chassis vacuum hose.
2 Connect the engine vacuum hose.
3 Connect the PCV hose.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2929
9. Connect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and the vacuum hose.
10. Install the EGR valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut.
11. Connect the TP sensor and IAC electrical connectors.
12. Connect the throttle cables.
1 Install the throttle cable bracket bolts.
2 Connect the throttle cable.
3 If equipped, connect the speed control cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2930
13. Install the air cleaner outlet tube.
1 Position the air cleaner outlet tube.
2 Install the hoses.
3 Install the clamps.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2931
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold
Lower Intake Manifold
Material
Removal
1. Disconnect the fuel hose spring lock coupling. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the fuel rail.
1 Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and wire harness locators.
2 Disconnect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose.
3 Release the wire harness retainers from the fuel injection supply manifold.
4. Remove the bolts and the lower intake manifold. Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. Clean and inspect all mating surfaces. 2. Install new gaskets in the lower intake manifold.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper > Page 2932
3. Install the lower intake manifold assembly and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
4. Connect the fuel rail.
1 Position the wire harness locators and connect the six fuel injector electrical connectors.
2 Connect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose.
3 Connect the fuel injection harness to the fuel supply manifold.
5. Install the upper intake manifold.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the flexplate.
2. Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and discard.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2937
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
NOTE: Lubricate the crankshaft rear oil lips with clean engine oil.
Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
2. Install the flexplate.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
2. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front oil seal and discard.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
Apply clean engine oil to the seal before installing the seal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2941
2. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal. 3. Install the crankshaft pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Valve Seals
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the valve spring.
2. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity.
Remove the valve seal.
Installation
NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil.
1. Using the special tool, install the valve seal. 2. Install the valve spring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2949
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2950
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing chain tensioner bolts ................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Cover bolts ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft.lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2961
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Special Tool(s)
Material
Removal
1. Remove the RH and LH valve covers. 2. Remove the oil pan. 3. Remove the generator.
4. Remove the bolt and the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the
power steering pump.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2962
7. Install front engine support insulator.
8. Remove the special tool. 9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the bolt and remove the belt tensioner. 11. Remove the crankshaft front seal.
12. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the bolt and the sensor.
13. NOTE: Remove the engine front cover with the vehicle raised in the air.
Remove the bolts, studs and the engine front cover. Remove and discard the front cover gaskets.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2963
Installation
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means
to clean the sealing surface. These tools cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use
a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant.
1. Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. 2. Install three new gaskets in the front
cover.
3. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of
applying the sealant.
Apply a 6 mm (0.24 inch) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower
cylinder block and cylinder head mating surfaces.
4. NOTE: Fasteners 1, 3, 4, 8, 10, 11, 14, 15 and 16 are studs.
Position the cover and install the studs and bolts in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2964
5. Install the (CKP) sensor and connect the electrical connector. 6. Install the crankshaft front seal.
7. Install the tensioner and bolt.
8. Install the CMP and the bolt.
- Connect the electrical connector.
9. Install the generator.
10. Install the oil pan. 11. Lower the vehicle.
12. Install the special tool.
13. Remove the front engine support insulator.
1 Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2965
2 Remove the bolts and the insulator.
14. Install the power steering pump. 15. Install the RH and LH valve cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM
Overview
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft
(phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT
systems.
- Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine
oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls
cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced
emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the
added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated
the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR
system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve
opening and exhaust valve closing.
Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS
system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L
3V.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft
positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP,
TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the
engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based
on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the
engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2970
cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will
disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC
will also be set when this fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the
flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page
2978
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2979
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle
Speed > System Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order .........................................................................................................................................
................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2994
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3003
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3004
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................ AWSF-32F
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3005
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 3009
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Water Pump
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Remove the coolant pump belt tensioner, if equipped.
4. Disconnect the three hoses.
5. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump assembly.
6. Separate the coolant pump from the coolant pump housing.
7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity .....................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 10L (10.5 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3015
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant VC-7-A (in Oregon VC-7-B) or equivalent (yellow-color)
Ford Specification.................................................................................................................................
......................................................WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: The addition of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, darkens Motorcraft
Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine Cooling System.
3. Disconnect the five hoses from the thermostat housing and remove the thermostat housing.
4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor from the bypass tube.
5. Remove the bolt, stud, and the bypass tube.
6. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. Remove the degas bottle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations
View 151-12
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3026
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3029
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
FAN CONTROL
Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty
Cycle)
LS6/LS8, Thunderbird: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM
The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C
on/off status, A/C pressure, etc) to determine engine cooling fan needs.
For Variable Speed Electric Fan(s):
The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the Fan Control
Variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly)
receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the
power applied to the fan motor).
For Relay Controlled Fans:
The PCM controls the fan operation through the Fan Control (FC) (single speed fan applications),
Low Fan Control (LFC), Medium Fan Control (MFC) and/or High Fan Control (HFC) outputs.
2.0L Focus (with A/C) And Taurus/Sable: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3030
2.0L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
Freestar, Monterey: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds Chart
For three speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium and high fan control
(FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3036
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3037
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3038
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3041
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3042
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3043
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3044
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3045
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3046
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3047
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3055
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3056
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3057
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3061
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3070
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3071
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3077
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3078
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3079
Heater Core: Description and Operation
HEATER CORE
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3080
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
WARNING: Carbon monoxide gas is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to
operate the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust
collector to vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater
core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged
Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection
by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and
appear as a leak in the heater core.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working
correctly.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: -
the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged, or
- the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure
tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose
clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the heater
core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3081
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes.
Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester
to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3082
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument
Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3091
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3092
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3098
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 3099
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3100
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3101
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator
Removal and Installation All vehicles
1. Drain the engine cooling system.
3. Remove the lower splash shields.
Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose and the degas return hose.
Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines
5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose, the high pressure transmission line and the degas return
hose.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 3105
All vehicles
6. Remove the lower center support bolt. 7. Lower the vehicle.
Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engines
8. Disconnect the remaining coolant hose connections.
Vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engines
9. Disconnect the transmission return line.
10. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and degas supply hose.
All vehicles
11. Position the hood latch assemble out of the way.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 3106
12. Remove the two bolts and the center support.
13. Remove the two top bolts retaining the cooling fan to the radiator.
14. Remove the upper radiator support brackets, and remove the radiator from the vehicle. 15. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3113
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3114
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 3115
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3118
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3119
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection High Speed Fan Control Relay 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3120
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3121
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Low Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3122
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3123
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 >
Page 3124
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3130
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3131
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3132
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
3136
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Starts to open ......................................................................................................................................
................................................ 90-93°C (194-200°F) Fully open ........................................................
............................................................................................................................................... 106°C
(223°F)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 3140
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Thermostat
Removal and Installation
1. Partially drain the engine cooling system.
2. NOTE: The appearance cover is shown removed for clarity.
Separate the thermostat housing.
3. Remove the thermostat and the O-ring seal from the thermostat housing.
4. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water pump bolts ................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3144
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Water Pump
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Remove the coolant pump belt tensioner, if equipped.
4. Disconnect the three hoses.
5. Remove the bolts and the coolant pump assembly.
6. Separate the coolant pump from the coolant pump housing.
7. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful
engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
(N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO,
NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in
the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of
Description and Operation for specific OBD catalyst monitor information.
The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on
the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 121) and (Figure
122) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S
are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be
used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to
monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three
HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst
will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is
utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3
(HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft
Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3149
4-cylinder engine, so only the Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized.
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to
301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 123). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC
and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3150
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO),
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 124) and then on into the muffler. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the
exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off
catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 125).
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for
a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for that vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3151
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or
palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how
the HO2S operates.)
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 3152
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger.
4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove
converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Right Hand Sequence
Left Hand Sequence
Exhaust manifold bolts ........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft.lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3156
Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation
EXHAUST MANIFOLD/RUNNERS
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > LH
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair LH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Removal
1. Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor.
2. Remove the bolts and the splash shield.
3. Remove the nuts and position the exhaust crossover aside.
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise, and remove the belt.
5. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > LH > Page 3159
6. Remove the nuts and LH exhaust manifold and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Position a new gasket and tighten the exhaust manifold in the sequence shown.
2. Position the A/C compressor and install the bolts. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner
clockwise and install the belt.
4. Position the exhaust crossover, and install the nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > LH > Page 3160
5. Install the splash shield. 6. Install the LH HO2S and the LH catalyst monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > LH > Page 3161
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair RH
Exhaust Manifold RH Removal
1. Remove the generator. 2. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 3. Disconnect the RH heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) tube nut to the exhaust manifold.
5. Remove the RH manifold.
^ Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Position a new gasket and install the exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > LH > Page 3162
2. Connect the EGR tube nut to the exhaust manifold. 3. Connect the RH HO2S electrical
connector. 4. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. Install the generator.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation
EXHAUST PIPES
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3166
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair
Exhaust Flexible Pipe - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the RH catalyst monitor.
3. Remove and discard the two nuts and separate the flexible Y-pipe from the manifold.
4. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
5. Remove the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3167
6. Remove the flexible pipe.
^ Disconnect from the hanger.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Muffler: Description and Operation
MUFFLER
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3171
Muffler: Service and Repair
Muffler - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the U-bolt.
3. Remove the nuts and the muffler.
^ Discard the gasket.
^ Discard the nuts.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Disconnect the resonator from the hanger and remove the resonator. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3183
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3184
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3185
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3186
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3187
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3188
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3189
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3190
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3191
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3192
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3193
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3194
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3195
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3196
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3197
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3198
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3199
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3200
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3201
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3202
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3203
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3204
59-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3205
59-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3206
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3207
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on
driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator
pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces
the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position
sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that
illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine
Soon" light.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is
driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is
17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the
bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the
main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km).
Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore
(approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is
non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate
or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in
the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body
assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass
actuator.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 3211
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy
GEN II ETC System
As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy
and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the
drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position
(driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and
transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004
MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 3212
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating
action.
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 3213
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2
Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Position Sensor Check
Throttle Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 3214
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off.
- 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop)
after key-up.
- 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle
= 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle.
- 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle.
- 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is
capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3219
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3220
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 3221
View 151-11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 3224
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 3225
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3226
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN).
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
- Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
- Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
- Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
- Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
- Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link.
The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3229
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET
Description
All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset.
The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic
information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II
system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults
occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive
Cycles
The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
- Clears the DTCs.
- Clears the freeze frame data.
- Clears diagnostic monitoring test results.
- Resets status of the OBD II system monitors.
- Sets DTC P1000.
Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM)
Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning
contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described
above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest.
After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It
will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability
and performance.
This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction
manual.
If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the
battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3230
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH
EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information
by vehicle when using WDS or NGS.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3234
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3235
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3236
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3241
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3242
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3243
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3247
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3248
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3249
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3254
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3255
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3256
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3265
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3266
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3267
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3268
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3272
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3273
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3274
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3278
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3282
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3283
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3284
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3288
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3289
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3290
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
3294
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module.
Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
- Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 3301
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3306
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type
(Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated
type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger
in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an
integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure
48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same
manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer
to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3307
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure
Sensor
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3311
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3322
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3323
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3324
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3325
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3328
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3329
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3330
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3331
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the
heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high
power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors
of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster,
which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S
heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not
interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3334
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3335
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3336
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3340
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3343
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3344
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3348
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3351
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3352
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3359
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3360
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3361
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3365
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3366
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3367
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 3373
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure
104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3381
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3384
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 3385
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3394
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3395
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3396
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
3400
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3403
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR
Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3410
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3411
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3414
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset
RESET INSTRUCTIONS
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment.
3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch
(refer to Owner Guide).
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again.
5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Again, check for leaking natural gas.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3415
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3422
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3423
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3424
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3429
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3430
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3431
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3437
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3445
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3453
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3454
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System
Information > Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order .........................................................................................................................................
................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3469
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 3478
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3479
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................ AWSF-32F
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3480
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3488
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3489
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3490
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3491
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3496
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type
(Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated
type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger
in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an
integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure
48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same
manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer
to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3497
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure
Sensor
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3511
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3512
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3513
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3514
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3515
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3516
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3517
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3518
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3519
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3520
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3521
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3522
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3523
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3524
59-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3525
59-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3526
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3527
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3531
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 3534
Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for
vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive
voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is
depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal
position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor
profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal
inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code
P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3538
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3539
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3540
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3544
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3548
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3549
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3550
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3554
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3555
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3556
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3562
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3565
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3566
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3567
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3568
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3569
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3570
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3571
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3572
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3573
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3574
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3575
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3576
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3577
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3578
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3579
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3580
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3581
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3582
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3583
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on
driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator
pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces
the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position
sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that
illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine
Soon" light.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is
driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is
17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the
bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the
main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km).
Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore
(approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is
non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate
or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in
the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body
assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass
actuator.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3587
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy
GEN II ETC System
As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy
and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the
drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position
(driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and
transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004
MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3588
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating
action.
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3589
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2
Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Position Sensor Check
Throttle Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3590
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off.
- 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop)
after key-up.
- 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle
= 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle.
- 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle.
- 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is
capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3595
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3596
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3597
View 151-11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3600
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3601
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3602
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN).
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
- Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
- Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
- Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
- Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
- Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link.
The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3605
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET
Description
All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset.
The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic
information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II
system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults
occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles
The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
- Clears the DTCs.
- Clears the freeze frame data.
- Clears diagnostic monitoring test results.
- Resets status of the OBD II system monitors.
- Sets DTC P1000.
Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM)
Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning
contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described
above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest.
After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It
will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability
and performance.
This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction
manual.
If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the
battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module (PCM) > Page 3606
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH
EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information
by vehicle when using WDS or NGS.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3610
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module.
Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Pump Signal > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pump Signal: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MONITOR
Applications Using a Fuel Pump Relay for Fuel Pump On/Off Control The Fuel Pump Monitor
(FPM) circuit is spliced into the fuel pump power (FP PWR) circuit and is used by the PCM for
diagnostic purposes. The PCM sources a low current voltage down the FPM circuit. With the fuel
pump off, this voltage is pulled low by the path to ground through the fuel pump. With the fuel pump
off and the FPM circuit low, the PCM can verify that the FPM circuit and the FP PWR circuit are
complete from the FPM splice through the fuel pump to ground. This also confirms that the FP
PWR or FPM circuits are not shorted to power. With the fuel pump on, voltage is now being
supplied from the fuel pump relay to the FP PWR and FPM circuits. With the fuel pump on and the
FPM circuit high, the PCM can verify that the FP PWR circuit from the fuel pump relay to the FPM
splice is complete. It can also verify that the fuel pump relay contacts are closed and there is a B+
supply to the fuel pump relay.
Fuel Pump Driver Module Applications
Fuel Pump Driver Module Duty Cycle Signals
The fuel pump driver module (FPDM) communicates diagnostic information to the powertrain
control module (PCM) through the Fuel Pump Monitor (FPM) circuit. This information is sent by the
FPDM as a duty cycle signal. The three duty cycle signals that may be sent are listed in the table.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
- Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3620
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3624
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot
function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass
within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or
bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve
responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors
engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- No touch start
- Cold engine test idle for rapid warm-up
- Idle (corrects for engine load)
- Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- Over-temperature idle boost.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3625
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the idle air control (IAC) valve.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the valve. Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3630
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3631
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3632
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3633
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3634
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3635
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3636
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3637
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3638
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3639
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3640
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3641
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3642
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3643
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3644
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3645
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3646
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3647
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3648
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3649
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3650
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration
Information Bus: Description and Operation Module Configuration
MODULE CONFIGURATION
Principles Of Operation
Definition of Terms
Calibration Update: Some modules are designed to be flashed or reflashed with complete new
software packages. This process of reflashing the module is a calibration update.
Programmable Parameters: These are options contained within the existing software. These
include items such as tire size, customer preference items and anti-theft options. The current
settings are downloaded from an existing module then uploaded to a new module. They can also
be configured using the diagnostic tool. Programming parameters is different from updating
calibrations as no software is changed, only the options already contained in the software.
Some modules must be programmed (configured) as part of the repair procedure. If this procedure
is not followed, the module will not function correctly and may set a number of DTCs, including
B2477 or P1639, which indicate that some necessary data has not been programmed into the
module.
Modules that need programming should not be exchanged between vehicles. In most cases the
parameter values or settings are unique to that vehicle, and if not set correctly will cause concerns
or faults.
The worldwide diagnostic system (WDS) will automatically attempt to retrieve the module
configuration information from all modules, and from a backup location in the powertrain control
module (PCM) when vehicle ID is carried out. If the module and the PCM do not contain correct
information, the diagnostic tool will either request As-Built data or display a list of items that you will
need to manually configure. The diagnostic tool will program the module based on the data you
enter.
For additional WDS/diagnostic tool programming procedures, refer to Programmable Module
Installation (PMI).
There are 3 different methods that are used for module programming: programmable module installation
- calibration update
- programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
The programmable module installation (PMI) method is used when a new programmable module is
installed on the vehicle. It is no longer necessary to command the diagnostic tool to gather module
option content from the old module. The diagnostic tool automatically obtains any available module
option content information from the old module during the vehicle ID routine that runs when the
diagnostic tool is initially connected to the vehicle. It is important that you connect WDS to the
vehicle and allow it to identify the vehicle and obtain configuration data prior to removing any
modules.
Calibration Update
Calibration update is used to install a new calibration and strategy into a module.
Programmable Parameters
If a module that has been modified using programmable parameters needs to be installed, the PMI
procedure will maintain the parameters in their altered state if the WDS is able to communicate with
the old module during vehicle identification. Otherwise you may need to use programmable
parameters to return them to the altered state.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block.
The PCM VID block may contain the factory settings for the configurable modules unless the PCM
is flashed with a new calibration, in which case some PCM parameters may be modified.
As-Built Data Center
The As-Built Data Center maintains a record of the vehicle configuration in a database. The vehicle
identification number (VIN) is required to obtain this information. The As-Built Data Center records
the applicable module configurations stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory.
The As-Built Data Center will always reflect the original build of the vehicle as it left the factory.
Contact the As-Built Data Center only when directed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration > Page 3653
Information Bus: Description and Operation Communications Network
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
The module communications network consists of the following items:
- standard corporate protocol (SCP) communications network
- international standards organization (ISO) communications network
- generic electronic module (GEM)
- powertrain control module (PCM)
- anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
- restraint control module (RCM)
- instrument cluster (IC)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The vehicle has two module communications networks. The standard corporate protocol (SCP)
network, which is an unshielded twisted pair cable (data bus plus, circuit 914 [TN/OG] and data bus
minus, circuit 915 [PK/LB]); and the international standards organization (ISO) 9141 network which
is a single wire (circuit 70 [LB/WH]). The diagnostic tool can connect to both networks through the
data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing
one smart tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the two networks from one
connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel on the driver side.
The SCP communication network will remain operational even with the severing of one of the bus
wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or voltage, or
if some, but not all, termination resistors are lost.
The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit inter-module communication. When the
diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic
tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications.
Unlike the SCP, the ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to
ground or battery voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network
loses power or shorts internally, communications to that module will fail.
There are two modules linked to the SCP communication network and three modules linked to the
ISO 9141 communication network.
The powertrain control module (PCM) is on the SCP communication network. The PCM controls
the engine for better fuel economy, emissions control and failure mode detection and storage.
The passive anti-theft system (PATS) is integrated into the PCM module. The PCM/PATS system
is connected to the vehicle electrical system, the transceiver module, the vehicle SCP
communications network and the vehicle anti-theft indicator located in the instrument cluster (IC).
The PCM module uses a microprocessor to control the system functions as well as illumination of
the anti-theft indicator. The illumination command is sent from the PCM through the SCP
communications network to the IC, which in turn sends power to the anti-theft indicator. The PCM
module microprocessor stores the ignition key codes in non-volatile memory. The PCM and IC
modules can be diagnosed through the data link connector.
The restraint control module (RCM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The RCM controls
the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input.
The generic electronic module (GEM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The GEM
controls a variety of systems:
- rear wiper
- cargo lamps
- interior lamps
- exterior lamps
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft (if equipped)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The
ABS module controls the brake pressure to the four wheels to keep the vehicle under control while
braking.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Communications Network
Initial Inspection
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) Fuse ROOM (10A)
- Wiring harness
- Connectors
- Instrument cluster (IC)
- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module
- Restraint control module (RCM)
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
- Powertrain control module (PCM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position is in RUN.
If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, go to Pinpoint Test H. See:
Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Tests/Test H
4. Go to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
PINPOINT TEST PC: DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS NETWORK TEST
Test PC1
Test A
PINPOINT TEST A: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT
RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3656
Test A1
Test A2-A3
Test B
PINPOINT TEST B: THE RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test B1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3657
Test B2-B3
Test C
PINPOINT TEST C: THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test C1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3658
Test C2-C3
Test D
PINPOINT TEST D: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test D1-D2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3659
Test D2-D3
Test E
PINPOINT TEST E: THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test E1-E2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3660
Test E2-E3
Test F
PINPOINT TEST F: NO MODULE / NETWORK COMMUNICATION - ISO 9141 NETWORK
Test F1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3661
Test F2-F6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3662
Test F7-F11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3663
Test F12
Test G
PINPOINT TEST G: NO MODULE / NETWORK COMMUNICATION - SCP NETWORK
Test G1-G5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3664
Test G6-G8
Test H
PINPOINT TEST H: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - NO POWER TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test H1-H2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3665
Test H2-H4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3666
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3667
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration
Configurable Modules
CONFIGURABLE MODULES
The vehicle contains the following modules that are configurable:
- generic electronic module (GEM)
- instrument cluster
- powertrain control module (PCM)
- anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
Initial Inspection
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. Refer to the chart.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Wiring harness
- Connectors
Programmable Parameters Index
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation
Information Bus: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
Using The New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester When The Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module Is Not Available
1. Install the new module. 2. Using the NGS tester and the latest version service function card,
SELECT: Programmable Module Installation. 3. Select: the module being installed. 4. Follow the
on-screen instructions. 5. SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU and press trigger. 6.
Follow the on-screen instructions. 7. The NGS will attempt to retrieve module data from the
powertrain control module (PCM).
- If the module data is available go to Step A.
- If the NGS displays: Call As-Built Data Center go to Step B
Step A 1. SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press trigger. 2. The NGS will complete
loading the retrieved data and display: Module Download Successful. 3. Test the module for correct
operation.
Step B 1. Press trigger. 2. If the NGS asks for vehicle data - enter the vehicle data then press
store. 3. The NGS will ask for module data line 1 - enter data and press store. 4. The NGS will then
ask if there is an additional line of data available for that address - Select YES or NO depending on
the information in the As
Built Data Sheet.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the answer is NO for Step 4. 6. The NGS should show a screen
stating that module data was stored - press trigger. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions. 8.
SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press trigger. 9. The NGS will complete loading
the entered data.
Using The New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester When The Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module Is Available
1. With the original module still installed, using the NGS tester and the latest version service
function card, SELECT: Programmable Module
Installation.
2. Select: the module being installed and press trigger. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4.
SELECT: Retrieve Module Configuration - Old ECU and press trigger. 5. Follow the on-screen
instructions. 6. INSTALL new module, SELECT: Restore Configuration - New ECU then press
trigger. 7. The NGS will complete loading the retrieved data.
Using The Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When The Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module Is Not Available
1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox
icon, select and highlight: Module Programming and then highlight the module that was installed
and press the check mark. 4. Select and highlight: Programmable Module Installation and then
highlight the module that was installed then press the check mark. 5. Follow the on-screen
instructions and turn the ignition key to the OFF position and press the check mark. 6. The WDS
will retrieve the module data from the PCM and automatically download the data into the new
module and display Module
Configuration Complete.
7. If the data is not available in the PCM, the WDS will display a screen stating to contact the
As-Built Data Center. 8. Enter the module data. 9. WDS will download the data into the new
module and display.
Using The Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS) When The Original Body Chassis Electrical
Module Is Available
1. Connect the WDS and ID the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select and highlight:
Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select and highlight: Programmable Module
Installation. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Install the new module. 6. Follow the on-screen
instructions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3670
7. Module configuration is complete.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3671
Information Bus: Service and Repair Programmable Module Installation - Using Backup Data
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION - USING BACKUP DATA
NOTE:
- If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
- Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the
PCM.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module
Configuration - Old ECU. The diagnostic tool will give you a message to reinstall the old module or
to continue for
backup data. If the module to be replaced will not communicate or has incorrect data, continue and
allow the diagnostic tool to find backup data. If the diagnostic tool successfully retrieves the backup
data, GO to Step 7 in this procedure. If the diagnostic tool prompts you to contact the As-Built Data
Center for backup information, contact the As-Built Data Center and obtain the backup data for the
vehicle and continue on.
3. After the As-Built Data Center backup data is obtained continue with the routine by entering the
VIN number of the vehicle when the diagnostic
tool prompts you to do so.
4. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter the vehicle data. The vehicle data is listed on the
As-Built Data Center sheet in the upper left-hand
portion, directly underneath the VIN for the vehicle.
5. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter information for the module that needs to be
reprogrammed. Enter all of the data that the diagnostic
tool requests. If the diagnostic tool requests information that is not listed on the As-Built Data
Center sheet, press NO.
6. Follow the text screens until all pertinent data is entered and the module data is stored. 7. Select
Restore Module Configuration - New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 8. Manually
validate each customer preference item for correct setting. If necessary, ask the customer what
setting would be their preference. Refer to
the Module Configuration Index for the list of customer preference items.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Programmable Module Installation > Page 3672
Information Bus: Service and Repair Customer Preference Items
CUSTOMER PREFERENCE ITEMS
NOTE:
- If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
- Make sure module is listed as supporting customer preference items and supports the specific
item to be configured in the Module Configuration Index.
1. Select Service Bay Functions on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select the module that contains the
customer preference item to be programmed. Refer to the Module Configuration Index. 3. Select
Customer Preference Items on the diagnostic tool. 4. Select Module Option Content. 5. Select the
item to be enabled or disabled. 6. Enable or disable the item as necessary to reflect the customer
preference.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3673
Information Bus: Tools and Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3677
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3681
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3682
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3683
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control
module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Charts
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3697
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3698
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3699
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3700
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3703
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3704
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 3705
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3706
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the
heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high
power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors
of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster,
which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S
heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not
interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3709
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3710
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3711
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3715
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3718
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3719
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3723
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page
3726
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3727
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3734
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3735
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3736
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3737
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3738
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3739
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3740
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3741
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3742
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3743
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3744
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3745
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3746
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3747
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3748
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3749
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3750
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3751
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3752
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3753
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3754
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3755
59-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3756
59-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3757
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3758
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The Generation II (Gen II) Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a hardware and
software strategy that delivers a transmission output shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on
driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes an electronic throttle body, the PCM and a accelerator
pedal assembly to control throttle opening and engine torque. The ETC system basically replaces
the standard cable operated accelerator pedal, idle air control (IAC) motor, 3-wire throttle position
sensor (TPS) and mechanical throttle body
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as: VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ETC also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are: Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate Idle Air Control (IAC) Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
- More responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
It should be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that
illuminates when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine
Soon" light.
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics 1. The DC motor is
driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the throttle plate shaft is
17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has the motor under the
bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the
main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km).
Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore
(approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is
non-adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate
or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in
the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body
assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass
actuator.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand. 1.
There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3762
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Electronic Throttle Control System Strategy
GEN II ETC System
As stated earlier the torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy
and to accommodate Variable Cam Timing. This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the
drivers pedal position. By uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from pedal position
(driver demand). This allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and
transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. ETC is used on the 2004
MY Lincoln LS and Ford Thunderbird, Explorer/Mountaineer, and the new light-duty F-series.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3763
The ETC monitor system is distributed across two processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a monitoring processor called an Enhanced-Quizzer (E-Quizzer)
processor. The primary monitoring function is performed by the Independent Plausibility Check
(IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the
driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the
generated torque exceeds driver demand by specified amount, the IPC takes appropriate mitigating
action.
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 1
ETC System Failure Mode And Effects Management, Part 2
Since the IPC and main controller share the same processor, they are subject to a number of
potential, common failure modes. Therefore, the E-Quizzer processor was added to redundantly
monitor selected PCM inputs and to act as an intelligent watchdog and monitor the performance of
the IPC and the main processor. If it determines that the IPC function is impaired in any way, it
takes appropriate Failure Mode and Effects Management (FMEM) actions.
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3764
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 1
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation, Part 2
Accelerator and Throttle Position Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Position Sensor Check
Throttle Position Sensor Check:
Throttle Plate Position Controller (TPPC) Outputs
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3765
Throttle Plate Controller Check Operation
The purpose of the TPPC is to control the throttle position to the desired throttle angle. It is a
separate chip embedded in the PCM. The desired angle is communicated from the main CPU via a
312.5 Hz duty cycle signal. The TPPC interprets the duty cycle signal as follows: 0% <= DC < 5% - Out of range, limp home default position.
- 5% <= DC < 6% - Commanded default position, closed.
- 6% <= DC < 7% - Commanded default position. Used for key-on, engine off.
- 7% <= DC < 10% - Closed against hard-stop. Used to learn zero throttle angle position (hard-stop)
after key-up.
- 10% <= DC <= 92% - Normal operation, between 0 degrees (hard-stop) and 82%, 10% duty cycle
= 0 degrees throttle angle, 92% duty cycle = 82 degrees throttle angle.
- 92% < DC <= 96% - Wide Open Throttle, 82 to 86 degrees throttle angle.
- 96% < DC <= 100% - Out of Range, limp home default position.
The desired angle is relative to the hard-stop angle. The hard-stop angle is learned during each
key-up process before the main CPU requests the throttle plate to be closed against the hard-stop.
The output of the TPPC is a voltage request to the H-driver (also in PCM). The "H" driver is
capable of positive or negative voltage to the Electronic Throttle Body Motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3770
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3771
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3772
View 151-11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3775
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3776
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3777
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE - VEHICLE SPEED OUTPUT (VSO)
The PCM-VSO (Powertrain Control Module - Vehicle Speed Output) speed signal subsystem
generates vehicle speed information for distribution to the vehicle's electrical/electronic modules
and subsystems that require vehicle speed data. This subsystem senses the transmission output
shaft speed with a sensor. The data is processed by the PCM, and distributed as a hard-wired
signal or as a message on the vehicle communication network (SCP or HS-CAN).
The key features of the PCM-VSO system are to:
- Infer vehicle movement from the output shaft sensor signal
- Convert transmission output shaft rotational information to vehicle speed information
- Compensate for tire size and axle ratio with a programmed calibration variable
- Utilize a transfer case sensor for four wheel drive applications
- Distribute vehicle speed information as a multiplexed message and/or an analog signal
The signal from a non-contact shaft sensor (Output Shaft Sensor--OSS or Transfer Case Shaft
Sensor--TCSS) mounted on the transmission (automatics, manuals, or 4X4 transfer cases) is
sensed directly by the PCM. The PCM converts the OSS or TCSS information to 8000 pulses per
mile, based on a tire and axle ratio conversion factor. This conversion factor is programmed into
the PCM at the time the vehicle is assembled and can be reprogrammed in the field for servicing
changes in the tire size and axle ratio. The PCM transmits the computed vehicle speed and
distance traveled information to all the vehicle speed signal users on the vehicle. VSO information
can be transmitted by a hard-wired interface between the vehicle speed signal user and the PCM,
or by Speed and Odometer data message via the vehicle communication network data link.
The VSO hard -wired signal wave form is a DC square wave with a voltage level of 0 to VBAT.
Typical output operating range is 2.22 Hz per MPH (1.3808 Hz per 1 km/h).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module
(PCM)
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) > Page 3780
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Reset
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET
Description
All OBD II scan tools support the powertrain control module (PCM) reset.
The PCM Reset allows the scan tool to command the PCM to clear all emission-related diagnostic
information. When resetting the PCM, a DTC P1000 will be stored in the PCM until all the OBD II
system monitors or components have been tested to satisfy a drive cycle, without any other faults
occurring. For more information about a drive cycle, refer to Drive Cycles. See: Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Drive Cycles
The following events occur when a PCM reset is performed: Clears the number of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs).
- Clears the DTCs.
- Clears the freeze frame data.
- Clears diagnostic monitoring test results.
- Resets status of the OBD II system monitors.
- Sets DTC P1000.
Resetting Keep Alive Memory (KAM)
Resetting Keep Alive Memory will return PCM memory to its default setting. Adaptive learning
contents such as idle speed, refueling event, and fuel trim are included. A PCM Reset (described
above) is also part of a KAM Reset. Both can be useful in post repair retest.
After Keep Alive Memory has been reset, the vehicle may exhibit certain driveability concerns. It
will be necessary to drive the vehicle to allow the PCM to relearn values for optimum driveability
and performance.
This function may not be supported by all scan tools. Refer to scan tool manufacturer's instruction
manual.
If an error message is received or the scan tool does not support this function, disconnecting the
battery ground cable for a minimum of 5 minutes may be used as an alternative procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) > Page 3781
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY - FLASH
EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the PCM. The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including
calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being reprogrammed or reflashed
repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
For Ford L-M technician's, check out the "Programmable Module Installation" link on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) web sight for quick Programmable Module data information
by vehicle when using WDS or NGS.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accommodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3786
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3787
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3796
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3797
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3798
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3808
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the clutch pedal position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3812
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3813
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor (Figure 33) is a thermistor device in which
resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the
temperature increases, and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The sensor is threaded into an engine
coolant passage. The ECT sensor is similar in construction to the IAT sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3814
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3818
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3819
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3820
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3824
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor (Figure 32) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature
increases, and increases as temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor is installed in the aluminum cylinder head and
measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature
information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an
overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM would then initiate a fail-safe cooling strategy based on
information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system failure such as low coolant or coolant loss
could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could
occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by
allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional information, refer to
Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy details.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL INPUT
The fuel level input (FLI) is a hard wire signal input to the PCM from the fuel pump (FP) module.
Refer to the description of the FLI in the On-Board Diagnostics II Monitors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
- Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
3831
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Stane Alone/Non-integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange
Type MAF Sensor
The intake air temperature (IAT) sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3836
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature
information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are two design types of IAT sensors used, a stand alone\non-integrated type
(Figure 39) and a integrated (Figure 40) type. Both types function the same, however the integrated
type is incorporated into the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use (2) IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. However, one is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for
standard OBD II/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger
in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature
information to the PCM to control border-line spark and to help determine intercooler efficiency.
Currently two types of IAT2 sensors are used. A non-integrated screw in type (Figure 39) and an
integrated type, which is part of the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) sensor (Figure
48). The TMAP sensor consists of a IAT thermistor and a manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor. The thermistor portion of the TMAP is used for IAT2 function and operates in the same
manner as a non-integrated IAT2. For additional information on the MAP portion of the TMAP, refer
to the Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor description and operation found later.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Page 3837
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure
Sensor
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3841
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
THERMAL MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure (TMAP) Sensor
The Thermal Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) (Figure 48) consists of a manifold
absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and an integrated thermistor. The MAP portion of the sensor uses
a piezo-resistive silicon sensing element to provide a voltage proportional to the absolute pressure
in the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of the sensor operates in the same manner as an
intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. For additional information on how the IAT sensor operates,
refer to the Intake Air Temperature Sensor description and operation.
For the 2.3L Ranger and 2.3L PZEV Focus, the TMAP sensor is part of the Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system. The PCM uses information from the MAP portion of the TMAP sensor,
throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT)
sensor or cylinder head temperature (CHT) sensor and crankshaft position (CKP) sensor to
determine how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. The thermistor portion of
the TMAP sensor is currently not being used on this application.
For the 4.6L SC Mustang, the PCM uses manifold absolute pressure information from the MAP
portion of the TMAP sensor along with other sensor inputs to determine the proper amount of fuel
needed for combustion under varying engine load conditions. The thermistor portion of the TMAP
sensor is used as a second IAT sensor. This second IAT sensor, located after the supercharger,
provides manifold air temperature information to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Typical Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor (Figure 35) is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases and increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage
drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to
temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system near the oil filter or screwed into the oil pan. The PCM can use the
EOT sensor input to determine the following:
- On Variable Cam Timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains
and logic for camshaft timing.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil
degradation.
- The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine
damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft
engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time,
the PCM will begin reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3852
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3853
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3854
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3855
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3858
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3859
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3860
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3861
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) (Figure 38) detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and
produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of
oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low
concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The
HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near
stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a
voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
temperatures of 800°C (1400°F). At approximately 300 °C (600°F) the engine can enter closed
loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater and the PCM will turn on the
heater by providing the ground when the proper conditions occur. Since model year 1998 a high
power HO2S heater and heater control system have been installed on the Stream 1 HO2S sensors
of most vehicles. The high power heater reaches closed loop fuel control temperatures faster,
which allows closed loop engine operation sooner. The use of this heater requires that the HO2S
heater control be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. The 6 ohm design is not
interchangeable with new style 3.3 ohm heater.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3864
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S), RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3865
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, LH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3866
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR, RH
Socket, Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor to aid in installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3870
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 3873
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Page 3874
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3878
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 3881
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3882
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3889
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3890
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3891
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3895
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3896
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page
3897
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 3903
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Full Open Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3910
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3911
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3912
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3916
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3917
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3918
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM
Overview
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft
(phase-shafting) as a function of engine operating conditions. There are four types of VCT
systems.
- Exhaust Phase Shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake Phase Shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual Equal Phase Shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have four operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and default mode. At
idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the phase angle are controlled by air flow, engine
oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM controls
cam timing based on engine RPM, load and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced
emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the
added benefit of improve torque. In addition, on some applications a VCT system can eliminated
the need for an external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR
system is accomplished by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve
opening and exhaust valve closing.
Currently for the 2004 model year, Ford Motor Company uses the PS and DEPS systems. The IPS
system is on Lincoln LS, Thunderbird and Focus SVT and the DEPS system is on the F150 5.4L
3V.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (camshaft position sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (crankshaft position sensor) provides the PCM with crankshaft
positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 115).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the IAT (intake air temperature), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), EOT (engine oil temperature), CMP,
TP (throttle position), MAF (mass air flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the
engine. At idle (low engine speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based
on air and coolant temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is
determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the
engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3922
cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It will continually update the
VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will
disable the VCT and place the camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected. A related DTC
will also be set when this fault is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the cam timing. One
half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing
chain. Oil chambers between the two halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the
flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure
forces the camshaft to rotate in either a advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed Sensor
OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED SENSOR
The Output Shaft Speed Sensor (OSS), provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with
information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.The (PCM) uses the information to control
and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of
vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending
upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which
powertrain control feature uses the information generated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 3928
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) (Figure 52) is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that
generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the
vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As
the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM
uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as
fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling and torque converter clutch
scheduling.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation
AIR BYPASS SOLENOID
Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid
The secondary air injection bypass (AIR bypass) solenoid (Figure 113) is used by the PCM to
control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The AIR bypass solenoid
is a normally closed solenoid. The AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit
vacuum release.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation
AIR DIVERTER VALVE
Air Injection Diverter (AIR Diverter) Valve
The secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve (Figure 114) is used with the electric AIR
pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the
electric AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral
check valve disk. When the electric AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter
valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the
exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the Secondary Air Injection System.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation
ELECTRIC AIR PUMP
Electric Air Pump
The electric AIR pump (Figure 112) provides pressurized air to the Secondary Air Injection system.
The electric AIR pump functions independently of rpm and is controlled by the PCM. The electric
AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of
system backpressure and system voltage. The inlet system of the AIR pump incorporates a splash
cap which helps to guard against dirt and water.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust Systems work together to control the release of harmful
engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
(N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO,
NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in
the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of
Description and Operation for specific OBD catalyst monitor information.
The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on
the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 121) and (Figure
122) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S
are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be
used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to
monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three
HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst
will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is
utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3
(HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft
Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3943
4-cylinder engine, so only the Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized.
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to
301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 123). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC
and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
Exhaust System
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3944
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO),
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 124) and then on into the muffler. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the
exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off
catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 125).
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for
a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for that vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3945
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or
palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how
the HO2S operates.)
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3946
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter - 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger.
4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove
converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3951
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Electronic EVAP Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 101) is part of the Enhanced EVAP system that is
controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to
the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is
normally closed valve. The electronic EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 102) controls the flow of
vapors electronically by way of a solenoid thereby, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum
regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs a signal between 0% and 100% duty cycle to
control the EVAP canister purge valve. On applications with Electronic EVAP canister purge valve,
the PCM outputs a signal between 0 mA and 1000 mA to control the solenoid.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3952
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disconnect the vacuum tube.
- Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
- Disconnect the EVAP return tube.
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve.
- Remove the two nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
DUST SEPARATOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3956
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3960
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3961
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose, dust separator and canister vent solenoid.
7. Remove the EVAP canister outlet tube.
8. Remove the EVAP canister.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure
104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the EVAP Leak Check Monitor, the canister vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 105) seals the EVAP
canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target
vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3971
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3972
Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the EVAP Leak Check Monitor, the canister vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 105) seals the EVAP
canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target
vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3973
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited, resulting in possible personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or fuel liquid is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3974
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose and the dust separator.
7. Remove the canister vent solenoid.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
- Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification
Drive Cycle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
EGR vacuum regulator valve bolts/nuts...............................................................................................
............................................................6 Nm (53 lb-in)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3979
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3980
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
EVR Solenoid
Test Graph
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Chart
The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid (EVR), (Figure 92) is an electromagnetic device which is used
to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically
controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the
vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed
to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no
electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not
enough to open the EGR valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3981
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disconnect the vacuum hoses.
3. Remove the PCM wiring harness bracket.
- Remove the nut.
- Position the bracket aside.
4. Remove the bolts and remove the EGR vacuum regulator valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 3985
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
Orifice Tube Assembly
Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly (Figure 94) is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the
intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates
a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure
differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which
provides feedback to the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 3986
EGR Tube: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD TO EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE TUBE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the EGR tube nut at the manifold connector.
2. Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR tube.
3. Disconnect the EGR tube fitting and remove the EGR tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Specifications
EGR Valve: Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
EGR valve bolts....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................25 Nm (18 lb-ft)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 3990
EGR Valve: Description and Operation
Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve
EGR Valve
The EGR valve (Figure 93) in the Differential Pressure Feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated EGR valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of exhaust gas
recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the
valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring
force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing service specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on-board diagnostic system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
Diagnostic Trouble Code if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured
directly as part of the field diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 3991
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the EGR valve.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Disconnect the EGR tube.
3 Remove the EGR valve and discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The EGR valve sealing surfaces are soft metals.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new EGR valve gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3995
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System > Page 3998
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3999
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Specifications
Oil Separator: Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
Crankcase vent oil separator bolts.......................................................................................................
...........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4004
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
CRANKCASE VENT OIL SEPARATOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left cylinder head.
2. Remove the two bolts.
3. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator and discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The sealing surfaces are soft metal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carefully clean both sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new crankcase vent
oil separator gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > PCV
Valve Hose > Component Information > Specifications
PCV Valve Hose: Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
PCV tube bolt.......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................23 Nm (17 lb-ft)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the crankcase vent hose from the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Remove the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and detach the wire harness from
the air cleaner box stud.
3. Loosen the clamp.
4. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner box cover.
1 Release the air cleaner box clamps.
2 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube from the throttle body.
3 Separate the air cleaner box outlet cover from the air cleaner box.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4011
4 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube and the air cleaner box cover assembly.
5. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose from the PCV valve.
6. Remove the PCV valve by rotating the valve 180 degrees and removing it from the oil separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure 103) or inline fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor (Figure
104) is used to measure the fuel tank pressure during the EVAP Leak Check Monitor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 4019
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback
EGR System
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 90) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR System > Page 4022
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Tube Mounted Differential
Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 91) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 4023
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4031
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4032
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information >
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 725 - 775 RPM
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4042
Accelerator Pedal: Description and Operation
ACCELERATION CONTROL
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: Make sure surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor
carpeting are not contacting the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable or the accelerator pedal
and shaft. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4045
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4046
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT
REMOVAL
2.0L Zetec
1. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever and bracket.
3.0L (4V)
2. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4047
4. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable.
2 Remove the bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the
accelerator cable end.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4058
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4059
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4060
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4061
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Specifications
Fuel: Specifications
Fuel Type .............................................................................................................................................
................................................ 87 Octane Unleaded
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation
FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP
The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will
illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system
due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull
vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8,
Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the
instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP
The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will
illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system
due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull
vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8,
Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the
instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel supply tubes will remain pressurized for long periods of time after engine shutdown. This
pressure must be relieved before repairing of the fuel system has begun. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the Fuel
Pressure Gauge.
2. NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service and Repair
FUEL CHARGING WIRING HARNESS
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. Disconnect the coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
3. Disconnect the radio ignition noise suppressor electrical connector.
4. Remove the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4079
5. Disconnect the 16-pin electrical connectors.
6. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
7. NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar.
Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators from
the fuel injection supply manifold.
8. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 9. Remove the RH wheel
and tire assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4080
10. Remove the RH lower splash shield.
11. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
12. NOTE: The oil pressure sensor is located behind the rear of the A/C compressor. The A/C
compressor has been removed for clarity.
Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector.
13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Remove the fuel charging wiring harness from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation
FUEL LINES AND FITTINGS
Fuel Line Assembly
A fuel line assembly (Figure 84) consists of flexible hose and/or stainless steel seamless tubing,
end fittings and tube nuts. The hose is a conductive polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) liner reinforced
with a stainless steel wire braided covering. The fittings are inserted into the hose ends and
crimped into place. The stainless steel tubing contains end fittings which are brazed to the tube.
There are high pressure fuel lines that are identified by either 1/4-inch or 3/8-inch outer diameter
and a low pressure fuel line identified by a 1/2-inch outer diameter. The low pressure fuel line has a
quick-connect at one end for connection to the fuel rail. The other fittings used on the natural gas
vehicle to connect fuel components are SAE O-ring face seal tube fittings. There are two end
types: an O-ring face seal end and a straight thread end. On tee and elbow fittings, a washer and a
positionable nut are provided to aid in orientation of the fitting.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
SPRING LOCK COUPLINGS
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover (Green)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the fuel line clip.
4. Install the special tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4086
5. Close and push the special tool into the open side of the cage.
6. Separate the coupling.
7. Remove the special tool.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect both coupling ends. Install new O-ring seals and garter springs if necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4087
2. Fit the male coupling into the female end and push until the garter spring snaps over the flared
end of the female coupling.
3. Verify coupling engagement by pulling on the lines.
4. Install the fuel line clip. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4088
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Vapor Tube Fittings
VAPOR TUBE FITTINGS
DISCONNECT
1. WARNING: The evaporative emission system contains fuel vapor and condensed fuel vapor.
Although not present in large quantities, it
still presents the danger of explosion or fire. Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery
to minimize the possibility of an electrical spark occurring, possibly causing a fire or explosion if fuel
vapor or liquid fuel is present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
1 Squeeze the fitting.
2 Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. 2. Remove any dirt or obstructions.
3. Push the tube into the fitting until it snaps in place.
4. Pull on the connection to make sure the fitting is secure. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4089
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Push Connect Quick Release Coupling
QUICK RELEASE COUPLING - PUSH CONNECT
DISCONNECT
1. WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel- related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel pressure must
be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Separate the coupling.
1 Depress the tabs
2 Separate the coupling.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the coupling and the tube for damage.
2. Align the tube to the coupling and push until you hear a click.
3. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged. 4. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4090
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair R-Clip Quick Release Coupling
QUICK RELEASE COUPLING - R-CLIP
DISCONNECT
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
repairing or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel pressure must
be relieved to prevent accidental spraying of fuel, causing personal injury or a fire hazard. Failure
to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the shipping tab by bending downward.
4. Spread the R-clip legs and push the clip into the fitting.
5. Separate the fitting from the tube.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. Remove any foreign material or
obstructions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 4091
2. Insert the R-clip into the fitting.
3. Align the tube and the fitting.
4. Insert the tube in the fitting and push together until a click is heard.
5. Pull on the connection to make sure it is fully engaged. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
The fuel system consists of the following
1. Fuel Rail 2. Fuel Injector 3. Fuel Pump Module (FPM) 4. Fuel Tank 5. Fuel Lines 6. Fuel Filter
The engines are equipped with sequential multiport fuel injection that is supplied by a new
returnless fuel delivery system (RFS). The powertrain control module (PCM) is able to maintain
constant fuel pressure by varying fuel pump module (FPM) output. This is accomplished by
increasing or decreasing voltage supplied to the tank mounted FPM. The RFS offers improved
economy, lower fuel temperature and decreased fuel vapor in the tank.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4096
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 82) used in the Natural Gas fuel system is a single-stage
pressure reducing regulator which expands natural gas from storage pressures of 1,379 to 20,685
kPa (200 to 3,000 psig) to engine fuel injector pressures of 724 to 862 kPa (105 to 125 psig).
The regulator contains a pressure relief device, a 1,896 kPa (275 psig) check valve, which protects
the low pressure fuel system. The low pressure fuel system no longer must fulfill the design
requirements of the high pressure fuel system, therefore reducing cost, weight and complexity.
When gas expands, the fuel temperature drops significantly causing extreme cold temperatures
(-177°C or -160°F) that may damage synthetic fuel system components as well as cause water
vapor within the fuel to condense, freeze and plug the lines, valve and injectors. To prevent this,
engine coolant is routed through the fuel pressure regulator to warm the fuel before it expands.
The regulator has an internal thermostat in its coolant bowl to control the flow of engine coolant.
This prevents overheating and subsequent thinning of the fuel which may cause lean combustion.
Outlet coolant flow is restricted by the thermostat when it rises above approximately 82°C (100°F).
If service of the coolant bowl and/or thermostat is required, the coolant bowl and thermostat are
serviced separately.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4100
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4103
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR
Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4109
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4110
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER
The fuel rail pulse damper located on the fuel rail reduces fuel system noise caused by the pulsing
of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold vacuum to
avoid fuel spillage in the event the pulse damper diaphragm were to rupture. (The pulse damper
should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator, it does not regulate fuel rail pressure.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4114
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service and Repair
FUEL PULSE DAMPER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the throttle body.
2. Remove the fuel pulse damper.
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose.
2 Remove the snap ring.
3 Remove the damper.
3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Use an O-ring seal that is made of special fuel resistant material. Use of an ordinary
O-ring seal can cause the fuel system to
leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seal.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4122
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
SCHRADER/SERVICE VALVE
schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4123
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4127
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4128
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4129
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Fuel Rail: Description and Operation
Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail Components
The fuel rail (Figure 80) distributes low pressure fuel from the chassis supply line to each fuel
injector. Fuel pressure at the top of each fuel injector is maintained within 1% of the other fuel
injectors at all times; this is done with nearly symmetric flow paths. The fuel rail is also designed to
have minimal flow restriction by increasing the cross-sectional flow area and reducing the flow path
length. The fuel rail contains several other parts in assembly (PIA) components that perform crucial
functions. These include:
- Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
- Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
- Low pressure solenoid shut-off valve which isolates the fuel rail from the upstream fuel system
when the engine is OFF. This minimizes the amount of fuel available to flow through the fuel
injectors when the engine is off or leak from a damaged fuel rail during and after a crash. The valve
is controlled by the PCM fuel shut-off valve circuit and contains an inertia switch. The valve is only
on for one second after a key-on or whenever CKP signals are being received by the PCM.
- schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 4133
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTION SUPPLY MANIFOLD
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure even when the engine is not running. Before
working on or disconnecting any of the fuel lines or fuel system components, the fuel system
pressure must be relieved. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the fuel line.
3. NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar.
Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators from
the fuel injection supply manifold.
4. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold.
- Remove the vacuum hose.
- Remove the bolts and the manifold.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil to aid installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Shut-off Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Shut-off Solenoid: Description and Operation
LOW PRESSURE SOLENOID SHUT-OFF VALVE
Low pressure solenoid shut-off valve which isolates the fuel rail from the upstream fuel system
when the engine is OFF. This minimizes the amount of fuel available to flow through the fuel
injectors when the engine is off or leak from a damaged fuel rail during and after a crash. The valve
is controlled by the PCM fuel shut-off valve circuit and contains an inertia switch. The valve is only
on for one second after a key-on or whenever CKP signals are being received by the PCM.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE
Heavy - Duty Riveter
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related component.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited, resulting in possible personal
injury.
Remove the left rear wheel.
2. WARNING: The fuel tank may be pressurized. remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. If a hissing
sound is heard, wait until the condition
stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. If these precautions are not followed, fuel may spray
and cause personal injury.
Remove the gas cap.
3. Remove the filler neck retaining screws.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4141
4. Remove the rivets and the fuel tank filler tube shield.
5. Remove the fuel filler tube.
1 Disconnect the hoses.
2 Remove the bolt and the fuel filler tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Use the Heavy-Duty Riveter to install the rivets.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4145
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4146
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4147
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel
pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies
fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump
continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet
maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the
bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial
fill.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Mounting
Straps > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Mounting Straps: Service and Repair
FUEL TANK SUPPORT STRAPS
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Use a suitable jack to support the fuel tank.
3. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the fuel tank strap and position the parking brake cable
aside.
4. NOTE: For 4WD vehicles, it will be necessary to disconnect a wiring harness clip from the fuel
tank strap.
Remove the bolts and the fuel tank straps.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4154
Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Sender Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry an open flame of any type when working on or near any
fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited,
resulting in possible personal injury.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Lift the LH rear seat
cushion.
4. Position the carpet aside.
5. Remove the screws and the fuel pump module access cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4155
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Disconnect the fuel and vapor lines from the fuel tank.
8. WARNING: The fuel tank may be pressurized. Remove the fuel tank filler cap slowly. If a hissing
sound is heard, wait until the condition
stops before removing the fuel tank filler cap. If these precautions are not followed, fuel may spray
and cause personal injury.
Remove the gas cap.
9. Using the special tool, remove the fuel pump module.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Install a new fuel pump mounting gasket.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Start the engine and visually inspect for leaks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4162
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly controls engine idle speed and provides a dashpot
function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass
within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or
bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve
responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors
engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired rpm.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control:
- No touch start
- Cold engine test idle for rapid warm-up
- Idle (corrects for engine load)
- Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- Over-temperature idle boost.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4163
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the idle air control (IAC) valve.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the valve. Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4167
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4168
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4171
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset
RESET INSTRUCTIONS
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment.
3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch
(refer to Owner Guide).
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again.
5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Again, check for leaking natural gas.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4172
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
1 Disconnect the crankcase vent hose.
2 Loosen the screw clamps.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from
entering the engine.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4179
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4180
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4181
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4186
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4187
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4188
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4192
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4193
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4194
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
INTAKE AIR RESONATOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left front wheel.
2. Remove the seven pin-type retainers and four screws and position aside the left inner fender
splash shield.
3. Remove the bolt and remove the intake air resonator.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Make sure the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for system monitoring. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and APP2
& APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation
APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2-5 V Reference Voltage
- 2- Signal Return (ground)
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
Electronic Throttle Body And Accelerator Pedal Assembly
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A value will be substituted for a faulty
signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4205
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4206
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire Terminals
Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4207
Typical "Drop-in" Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air
entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at
200°C (392°F) above ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire (Figure 42). If the
hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced, then the entire assembly must be replaced.
Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration.
The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the air mass flow.
The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air
mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired
air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC),
shift and torque converter clutch scheduling.
Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology (IBT) with an integrated intake air
temperature (IAT) sensor.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4208
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4212
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 36) is a diaphragm strain gauge device in which
resistance changes with pressure. The electrical resistance of a strain gauge increases as
pressure increases, and decreases as pressure decreases. The varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding
to pressure.
Strain gauge type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow.
Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor determines the
voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage
drop across the fixed resistor.
The FRP sensor measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This signal is used by
the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine combustion cylinder.
Fuel Rai Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The fuel rail pressure (FRP) sensor (Figure 37) senses the pressure difference between the fuel
rail and the intake manifold. The return fuel line to the fuel tank has been deleted in this type of fuel
system. The differential fuel/intake manifold pressure together with measured fuel temperature
provides an indication of the fuel vapors in the fuel rail. Both differential pressure and temperature
feedback signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump
sustains fuel rail pressure which preserve fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel
injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to
decrease.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System > Page 4215
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
INJECTION PRESSURE SENSOR
Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulsewidth and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4222
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4223
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 76) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System > Page 4226
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Operation
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 87) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch Reset
RESET INSTRUCTIONS
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment.
3. NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
If no natural gas leak is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch
(refer to Owner Guide).
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again.
5. WARNING: If you smell natural gas at any time other than during fueling, do not reset the IFS
switch.
Again, check for leaking natural gas.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4227
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4234
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4235
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4236
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Throttle Body Housing
THROTTLE BODY HOUSING
The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and
a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed)
position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return
stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also
establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate
air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This
sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation.
Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include:
1. Idle air control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some
vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the
throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps
for PCV, EGR, EVAP and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles only). 5. PCV air return (if
applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted throttle position (TP) sensor.
Typical Attention Decal Locations
7. A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant
to engine intake sludge accumulation. These
throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal (Figure
110) advising not to clean.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Throttle Body Housing > Page 4241
Throttle Body: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE BODY (ETB)
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 133) has the following characteristics
1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the
throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has
the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2 times stronger than the
main spring). Default angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (48 Km).
Typically this throttle angle is 7 to 8 degrees from the hard-stop angle.
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding in the bore (-0.75
degree). This hard stop setting is non-adjustable and
is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the throttle plate
or to use plate sealant. The hole is not required in
the ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body
assembly. This plate angle controls idle and idle quality and eliminates the need for IAC bypass
actuator.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP sensor assembly requires four wires. 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4242
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL
WARNING: Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or
near any fuel-related components. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the accelerator cable and the speed control cable (if equipped) from the throttle body
lever.
3. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and position the transmission vent tube and bracket aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 4243
5. Remove the bolt, the stud bolt and the throttle body.
- Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4252
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available
on January 17, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
[New!] RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4253
Note:
Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review
the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4254
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES
Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a
PCS claim as described below:
^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted.
^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses.
PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS
When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER
NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields:
^ REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31,
2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL
1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4255
[NEW] CAUTION:
Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the
speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator
cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See
Figure 1.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4256
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2.
A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the
cam.
B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either
way and pulling it from the bracket.
C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See
Figure 3.
D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle.
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet.
2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows:
A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the
cam.
B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45
degrees to lock it in place.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4257
D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to
retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4.
3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal.
4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped.
5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4258
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4259
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04
> Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Recalls Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004
COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may
prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position.
CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance
and may result in a vehicle crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January
17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4269
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available
on January 17, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
[New!] RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4270
Note:
Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review
the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4271
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES
Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a
PCS claim as described below:
^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted.
^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses.
PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS
When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER
NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields:
^ REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31,
2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL
1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4272
[NEW] CAUTION:
Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the
speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator
cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See
Figure 1.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4273
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2.
A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the
cam.
B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either
way and pulling it from the bracket.
C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See
Figure 3.
D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle.
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet.
2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows:
A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the
cam.
B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45
degrees to lock it in place.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4274
D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to
retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4.
3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal.
4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped.
5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4275
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4276
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: >
NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
Throttle Cable/Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable
Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004
COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may
prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position.
CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance
and may result in a vehicle crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January
17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4281
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4282
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation
ACCELERATION CONTROL
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: Make sure surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor
carpeting are not contacting the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable or the accelerator pedal
and shaft. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4285
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Accelerator Cable
ACCELERATOR CABLE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
3 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4288
4. CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
Remove the accelerator cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4289
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Accelerator Cable Bracket
ACCELERATOR CABLE BRACKET
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever.
1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever.
2 Rotate the throttle lever.
3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable
bracket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Cable > Page 4290
4. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Full Open Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Throttle Full Open Switch: Description and Operation
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE A/C CUT-OFF (WAC)
The wide open throttle A/C cutoff relay (may be referred to as the A/C clutch relay) is wired
normally open (normally closed for Aviator). There is no direct electrical connection between the
A/C switch or EATC Module and the A/C clutch. The PCM will receive a signal indicating that A/C is
requested (for some applications, this message is sent through the BUS + and BUS - circuits).
When A/C is requested, the PCM will check other A/C related inputs that are available (such as
ACP (SW), ACCS). If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK
(such as coolant temperature, engine rpm, throttle position), the PCM will ground the WAC output
(unground for Aviator), closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/C clutch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4297
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4298
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4299
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
Remove the throttle position (TP) sensor. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV)
Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV)
The intake manifold tuning valve (IMTV) (Figure 109) is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly
to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft.
There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit will not be energized below approximately 2600 rpm or higher on some
vehicles. The shutter will be in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake
manifold. Above approximately 2600 rpm or higher, the motorized unit will be energized. The
motorized unit will be commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the
shutter to the open position and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the
shutter open.
1. The PCM uses the TP sensor and CKP signals to determine activation of the IMTV system.
There must be a positive change in voltage from the
TP sensor along with the increase in rpm to open the shutter.
2. The PCM uses the information from the input signals to control the IMTV. 3. When commanded
on by the PCM, the motorized actuator shutter opens up the end of the vertical separating wall at
high engine speeds to allow
both sides of the manifold to blend together.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order .........................................................................................................................................
................................................................ 1-4-2-5-3-6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4308
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4316
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4317
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4318
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4322
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4323
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4324
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
TSB 05-22-8
11/14/05
WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG (COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE
MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING
FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006
E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006
Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS
1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego
2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years.
NOTE
FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs
RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED.
ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem.
ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS
Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition
problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been
completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure
outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and
help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through
1-800-ROTUNDA.
The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire
diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not
random misfires. Random misfires have a different root cause and are not covered by this TSB.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4329
Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes
for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems.
Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools
for misfire diagnosis:
^ Self-test (Check for codes first)
Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern)
^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue)
^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted)
^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly)
^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis)
NOTE
USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR
DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED.
If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a
fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative
Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer
concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1.
Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4330
The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to
proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque
the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be
reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before
going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem
then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3),
road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power
Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load
conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2.
Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test)
Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel
Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4331
a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to
Step 3.
Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test)
Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both
duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in
Figure 5 and Figure 6.
NOTE
LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA
TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING.
THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4332
MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO
STEP 4.
If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values
displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system.
Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark
plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the
issue is the coil or the spark plug.
Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope)
WARNING
SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY
FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK.
SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so
the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around
the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable.
CAUTION
THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING
THIS PROCEDURE.
Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route
the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise
interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the
cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will
show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands
and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark.
COP Stress Test Procedure:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4333
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4334
Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select
COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil
being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is
sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark
to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All
settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get
with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform
is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug.
Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to
Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in
Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak
signal in Figure 7.
Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure.
Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some
misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 4335
Ignition Coil: Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
Coil hold-down bolts.............................................................................................................................
...........................................................6 Nm (53 lb-in)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4338
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4339
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4340
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4341
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4342
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4343
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4344
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP)
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP)
COIL ON PLUG
Coil On Plug
The coil on plug (COP) (Figure 65) ignition operates similar to standard coil pack ignition except
each plug has one coil per plug. COP has three different modes of operation: engine crank, engine
running, and CMP Failure Mode Effects Management (FMEM).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4347
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack
COIL PACK
Horizontal Connector Six Tower Coil Pack
Series 5 Six Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4348
Four-Tower Coil Packs
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 4349
Series 5 Four Tower Coil Pack
Coil packs come in four tower, Series 5 four tower, six-tower horizontal connector and Series 5 Six
tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For
six-tower coil pack (six cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4
(Figure 61) and (Figure 62). For four-tower coil pack (four cylinder) applications the matched pairs
are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3 (Figure 63) and (Figure 64).
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - LH
IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG - LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the coil-on-plug.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH > Page 4352
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - RH
IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG - RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the coil-on-plug.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4356
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4357
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4358
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4362
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4367
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4368
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4369
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4374
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4375
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Typical Hall-Effect Sensor
Typical Variable Reluctance Sensor
The camshaft position (CMP) sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor
identifies when piston No.1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the powertrain
control module (PCM) and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. The Coil
On Plug (COP) ignition applications also use the CMP signal to select the proper ignition coil to fire.
The input circuit to the PCM is referred to as the CMP input or circuit. DTC P0340 is associated
with this sensor.
Vehicles with two CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the
second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. DTC
P0345 is associated with this sensor and it is referred to as CMP2.
There are two types of CMP sensors: the three pin connector Hall-effect type sensor (Figure 28)
found on F-Series 4.2L applications, and the two pin connector variable reluctance sensor found on
all other vehicles (Figure 29).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4376
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4380
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4381
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (INTEGRATED IGNITION SYSTEMS)
Three Different Types Of Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensors
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block or
timing cover and is adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the
crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the
powertrain control module (PCM). The trigger wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees
apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth
spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
trigger wheel, the CKP indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By
monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize
the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to
fixed reference (Figure 31).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4382
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4390
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KNOCK SENSOR
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
The knock sensor (KS) (Figure 41) is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine
vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine
knock and to retard spark timing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug Gap ...................................................................................................................................
.................................... 0.52 - 0.56 in. (1.3 - 1.4 mm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap > Page 4395
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark Plug Torque ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 11 ft. lb. (15 Nm)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4396
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug Type ..................................................................................................................................
................................................................ AWSF-32F
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4397
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Locations > Page 4408
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4419
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4420
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4421
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4426
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4427
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4428
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4440
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4441
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4442
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4447
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4450
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4451
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4452
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4453
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 4454
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4463
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4464
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4465
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General
PCM Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4470
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4471
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4482
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the
event of a leak. If servicing is required due to a
servo condition, it is necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the
intermediate/overdrive band assembly and direct clutch for damage.
Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force.
Use caution when removing servo cover.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
3. Remove the splash shield.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4491
4. Remove the transmission cooler line bracket and bolt, and position the bracket out of the way.
5. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the
retaining ring.
Using the special tool, remove the servo retaining ring. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Compress the
servo assembly by tightening the bolt. 3. Remove the retaining ring.
6. Remove the special tool. 7. Remove the servo cover assembly. 8. Remove the intermediate and
overdrive servo piston and return spring. 9. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a
lint-free cloth.
10. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover
cap with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing
surface may result.
Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for
damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod.
11. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston. 12. Inspect
the servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4492
1. WARNING: Servo return spring force is very high. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
2. Install the special tool.
3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the
retaining ring.
NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining
ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the
servo cover retaining ring can be installed.
Tighten the special tool bolt. ^
Install the servo cover retaining ring.
4. If the case is stamped "WG", install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged.
5. Loosen the special tool bolt.
^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4493
6. Install the transmission fluid cooler line.
7. Install the splash shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Start the vehicle. Place transmission range
selector lever in each gear and allow to engage. Check for leaks.
10. Check transmission fluid.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity
..........................................................................................................................................................
9.5L (10 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4502
Differential Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4507
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4508
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 9.5L (10.0 qts.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4511
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4514
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level
check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before
checking.
Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the
vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for
instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid
level should be checked.
Fluid Level Check
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal operating temperatures. 2.
Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With your foot on the brake,
start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time
for each gear to
engage.
4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal and room temperature.
Low Fluid Level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid level indicator
and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
High Fluid Level
Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of
transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage.
High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission
component damage.
An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible
damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally
indicated on the fluid level indicator.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4515
If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician.
Fluid Condition Check
NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If
the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with
MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V
specification.
^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check.
^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an
overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure.
^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of
solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator).
If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug
should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If
transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the
transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque
converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and
adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic
tests and adjustments listed must be completed to make sure that the problem has been
eliminated.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4519
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Disconnect the front cooler tube.
4. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube.
5. Disconnect the rear cooler tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4523
6. Remove the rear transmission cooler tube bracket bolt and the cooler tube. 7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Disconnect and remove the integral to auxiliary cooler tube. 9. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Transmission Pan Torque Sequence
Transmission Fluid Pan Bolts ..............................................................................................................
..................................................... 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4535
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4536
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4537
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Main Control Cover and Gasket
Removal
1. Remove the battery tray.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray bracket.
3. Remove the battery tray bracket.
4. Remove the breather tube and disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the intake tube and the air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4542
6. Remove the vent tube hose. 7. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 8. Remove
the LH front wheel.
9. Remove the LH splash shield.
10. Remove the main control cover bolts and the cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4543
11. Remove the main control cover gasket from the pan.
Installation
1. Position the main control cover gasket on the case.
2. Position the main control cover on the case and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4544
3. Tighten the bolts in the sequence as indicated.
4. Install the LH splash shield. 5. Install the LH front wheel.
6. Install the vent tube hose.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4545
7. Install the intake tube and the air cleaner cover.
8. Install the breather tube and connect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
9. Install the battery tray bracket.
10. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket. 11. Install the battery tray.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4546
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals-LH
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4547
2. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. Remove the LH halfshaft.
4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Remove the
drain pan and lower the vehicle.
4. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe
sealant.
5. Add automatic transmission fluid.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4548
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as
necessary. 7. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4549
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals-RH
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Determine the source of the fluid leak. If the leak is from the transaxle, continue with this
procedure.
If it is determined that the fluid leak is coming from the power take-off (PTO) unit, remove the PTO.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4550
3. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid
4. Remove the RH halfshaft. 5. If equipped remove the PTO.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal.
7. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
Installation
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Main Control Cover and Gasket > Page 4551
2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
3. If equipped install the PTO. 4. Install the RH halfshaft.
5. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe
sealant.
6. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 7. Add automatic transmission fluid. 8. Start the
engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary.
9. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4562
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4563
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4564
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
4569
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page
4572
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4573
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4574
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4575
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4576
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4581
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4582
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4583
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar.
1. Remove the clockspring. 2. Remove the multifunction switch. 3. Remove the windshield
wiper/washer switch.
4. Disconnect the gearshift cable.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness from the gear shifter assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4590
7. Remove the bolts and the gearshift lever assembly. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the
gearshift lever detent. 4. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb)
weight from the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4595
5. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 6. Remove the weight from
the gearshift lever. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the PARK position and remove the feeler gauge.
8. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws.
9. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4596
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar.
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket.
1. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4597
2. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket.
4. Remove the gearshift cable nuts.
5. Detach the gearshift cable from the transaxle shifter lever.
6. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the bracket by depressing the locking tabs at the bracket.
7. Remove the gearshift cable.
Installation
NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4598
1. Install the gearshift cable.
2. Install the gearshift cable in the bracket.
3. Connect the gearshift cable to the transaxle shifter lever.
4. Install the gearshift cable nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4599
5. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever.
1. Attach the gearshift cable to the steering column bracket. 2. Connect the gearshift cable to the
gearshift lever.
6. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the
gearshift lever detent. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb)
weight from the gearshift lever.
8. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten.
9. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1. Position the lower steering column shroud. 2. Install the screws.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4600
10. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Cooler: Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4604
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to
the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers
heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler
transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the
inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install
new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the
concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and go to the following
Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4607
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Remove the bolts and the auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4610
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler
1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting
them to the cleaner.
Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the
fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet
end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir.
2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off helps dislodge contaminants in the cooler system.
Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5.
Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6.
Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4611
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler-Backflushing and Cleaning
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: Test the Torque Converter Cleaner to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding. Install a new system filter if flow is weak or contaminated.
1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of this fluid cooler tubes to connect them to
the cleaner.
Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1. Connect the pressure line to the
fluid cooler inlet tube. 2. Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube. 3. Place the outlet
end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir.
2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off will help dislodge contaminants in the cooler system.
Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of five minutes.
3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5.
Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6.
Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the cross brace.
4. Remove the lower vibration dampener.
5. Remove the cross brace.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4619
6. Remove the top and bottom mount cups.
7. Remove the rubber mount.
Installation
1. Install a new rubber mount.
2. Install the top and bottom mount cups.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4620
3. Install the cross brace.
4. Install the lower vibration dampener.
5. Install the cross brace.
6. Install the splash shield. 7. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4621
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC
Removal
1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
4. Remove the bolts and nuts from the mount, and remove the mount.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4622
1. NOTE: Prior to tightening the mount nuts install the mount bolt for correct alignment.
Install a new mount and bolts. 1. Install the mount. 2. Loosely install the bolt for correct alignment.
3. Tighten the bolt.
2. Install the air cleaner assembly.
3. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
4. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4623
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator-LH
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4624
2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
4. Install the special tools.
5. Install the special tools.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4625
6. Remove the upper transaxle mount bolt.
7. Remove the upper transaxle insulator.
8. Remove the top and bottom mount cups.
Installation
1. Install the top and bottom mount cups.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4626
2. Install the upper transaxle insulator.
3. Install the upper transaxle bolt.
4. Remove the special tool.
5. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator-Lower, Front > Page 4627
6. Install the air cleaner assembly.
7. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
8. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4631
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4632
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4633
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4638
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4641
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4642
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4643
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4644
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4645
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4649
Valve Body: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4650
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector, and TR sensor connector.
6. Disconnect the shift cable.
7. Remove the shift cable and bracket, and position out of the way.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4651
8. Remove the vent tube hose. 9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the LH front wheel.
11. Remove the splash shield.
12. Remove the main control cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4652
13. Remove the main control cover gasket.
14. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the main control valve body bolts.
15. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve.
Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link.
16. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through
the transaxle case.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4653
17. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while
removing from the vehicle.
Installation
1. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. Install a new
O-ring seal, if damaged, before installing the
connector into the case.
Push the solenoid valve body harness connector into the case.
2. Connect the manual valve link to the main control valve body.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4654
3. Install the main control valve body and tighten the bolts in sequence as indicated. 4. Loosen the
nut on the ball stud for the manual valve detent lever actuating rod assembly.
5. Move the manual control lever shaft to the "D" position.
^ Install the pin to hold the special tool in place.
6. Move the manual valve detent lever assembly to the "D" position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4655
7. Tighten the nut on the ball.
^ Remove the shifter pin from the special tool.
8. Tighten the detent nut. Rotate the manual control lever back to "D" to recheck the adjustment.
9. Using the special tool, recheck the manual control lever assembly setting.
10. Install the manual control lever.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4656
11. Install and rotate the manual valve detent lever assembly to the neutral position.
1. Low 1 2. Low 2 3. Drive 4. Neutral 5. Reverse 6. Park
12. Install the gasket on the case.
13. Install the main control cover, and tighten the bolts in sequence as shown.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4657
14. Install the splash shield. 15. Install the LH front wheel. 16. Lower the vehicle.
17. Install the shift cable and bracket.
18. Connect the shift cable.
19. NOTE: Before installing the vent tube hose, clean out any obstructions in the hose using low air
pressure.
Install the vent tube hose to the fitting on the main control cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4658
20. Connect the transaxle harness connector, and the TR sensor connector.
21. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
22. Connect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor.
23. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery tray and battery.
24. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms
can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive
strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
25. Check the transmission fluid, add fluid as necessary. 26. Start the engine and move the
transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 27. Make sure the
vehicle will only start in PARK, and then in NEUTRAL. Verify that the backup lamps illuminate in
the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos
dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos
fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by
dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust
and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as
sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to
the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be
done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and
posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service
should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the transaxle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 4663
2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate
as necessary.
7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is
not within specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 4664
8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs
^ wear or rust on splines
9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within
specifications.
10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^
cracks
^ distortion
^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 4665
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten
them in sequence to specification.
3. Remove the special tool.
4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
Clutch Fluid Type .................................................................................................... Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06
> M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4
> May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking
Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4683
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. CAUTION: Note the location and orientation of the clutch push rod retainer. If any damage to the
retainer occurs during removal or installation,
replace the retainer clip. The retainer must be correctly installed during assembly.
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
2. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nut.
3. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglyeol ethers and polyglyeols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake
fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation
persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the clutch master cylinder and plug it to prevent
excess fluid loss.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4684
4. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube from the clutch master cylinder.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
1. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut. 2. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that the push rod retainer is correctly positioned.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglyeol ethers and polyglyeols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake
fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation
persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss.
2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder.
1. Remove the clutch slave cylinder bolts 2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. CAUTION: Note the location and orientation of the clutch push rod retainer. If any damage to the
retainer occurs during removal or installation,
replace the retainer clip. The retainer must be correctly installed during assembly.
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
5. Remove the clutch pedal.
1. Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 4691
2. Remove the clutch pedal.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that the push rod retainer is correctly positioned.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4695
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the rubber boot.
3. Remove the clutch release fork and bearing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the flywheel. 2. Inspect the pilot bearing for:
^ misalignment and looseness in the crankshaft
^ needle rollers for scoring, worn or broken rollers, inadequate grease or discoloration
^ seal leakage
3. NOTE: Install a new pilot bearing only if it is damaged.
Using the special tool, remove the pilot bearing. 1. Install the special tool. 2. Remove the pilot
bearing.
4. Clean the transaxle input shaft with a wire brush. 5. Inspect the transmission input shaft for:
^ burrs
^ rust
^ damage to the input shaft spline
^ damage to the input shaft on the pilot bearing contact surface
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 4702
1. Using the special tool, install the pilot bearing. 2. Apply a light coating of Premium Long-Life
Grease XG-1-C, XG-1-K or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M1C75-B to the transaxle
input shaft.
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Clutch pressure plate bolts ..................................................................................................................
...................................................... 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4706
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos
dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos
fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by
dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust
and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as
sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to
the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be
done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
WARNING: OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and
posted with warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service
should be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the transaxle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4707
2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate.
5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate
as necessary.
7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is
not within specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4708
8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs
^ wear or rust on splines
9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within
specifications.
10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^
cracks
^ distortion
^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4709
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten
them in sequence to specification.
3. Remove the special tool.
4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow
Capability/Service Kit Requirements
TSB 06-7-1
04/17/06
NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS
FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape,
Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac
LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart.
ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral
tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make
the vehicle neutral tow capable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 4714
ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable.
Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions
are included with the kit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 4715
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential >
Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential >
Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4721
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Differential Cover: Specifications
Rear Drive Axle Differential Housing Cover Retaining Bolt
................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4725
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Rear Drive Axle Differential Housing Cover
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the differential fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Remove the bolts and the rear differential cover. ^
Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing, the differential housing
cover and the rotary blade coupling housing are
clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be
covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing, the differential housing cover and the
rotary blade coupling housing.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the differential housing cover and bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4726
4. Fill the rear axle with 1.4 liters (2.95 pints) of rear axle lubricant.
^ Tighten the filler plug.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential
Lock > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential
Lock > Component Information > Locations > Page 4731
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Refill .....................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 2.95 pts. (1.4L) NOTE: Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16
inch) from the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4736
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
Rear Axle ........................................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 4741
2. To remove the seal only, use the special tool and remove the stub shaft seal.
3. To remove the bearing and seal use the special tools and remove the stub shaft pilot bearing
and seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing with rear axle lubricant.
To install the bearing, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with grease.
To install the seal, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Rear Drive Axle Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 4742
3. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing
the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal
journal with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 > May > 05 >
Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 >
May > 05 > Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Axle Shaft Assembly: Mechanical Specifications
Front Drive Half Shaft
General Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4759
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts
The front wheel drive halfshafts consist of the following components: ^
inboard CV joints
^ outboard CV joints
^ intermediate shaft/bearing
^ halfshaft
The intermediate shaft contains a pressed on bearing which is can only be repaired as an
assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4762
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Halfshaft Joint
The front wheel halfshaft joints consist of the following components: ^
inboard CV joints
^ outboard CV joints
^ halfshaft joint boot clamps
^ halfshaft joint boots
^ tripod joint housings
^ retainer circlips
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4763
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshaft
Rear Drive Halfshafts
CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease
leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation
with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss
of the CV joint grease.
^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
^ Inboard and outboard CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross
groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together.
^ An axle circlip retains the splined inboard CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a new axle
circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle
^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outboard
CV joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed
from the vehicle.
Halfshaft Handling
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV joint. Do not
over-angle the CV joints. Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is over-plunged
outward from the joint housing. Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Never use
the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the
halfshaft. Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Handle the
halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints.
Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from the inside without evidence of
external damage.
Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshaft
Removal and Installation Halfshaft
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: RH shown; LH similar.
1. Remove the front wheels and tires.
2. Remove and discard the front axle wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4766
3. Remove the clip.
4. Separate the lower control arm from the front wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower control arm from the front wheel knuckle.
5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the front wheel knuckle.
6. Using the special tools, remove the halfshaft.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4767
1. NOTE: When seated correctly, the driveshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into
the differential side gear groove.
Position the front wheel driveshaft and joint so the splines line up with the differential side gear
splines. Push the front wheel driveshaft and joint into the differential side gear.
2. Using the special tool, position the halfshaft into the front wheel knuckle.
3. Install the lower control arm and the ball joint pinch bolt and nut.
4. Install the clip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4768
5. Install a new front axle wheel hub nut. 6. Install the front wheels and tires. 7. Check and refill the
transaxle fluid.
Removal and Installation Intermediate Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH front drive halfshaft.
2. Remove the two inner halfshaft bearing retainer nuts.
3. Remove the inner halfshaft. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Disassembly and Assembly Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4769
2. Secure the halfshaft and constant velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers.
3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps.
4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing.
5. Separate the tripod joint from the inboard CV joint housing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4770
6. If reinstalling the original tripod joint, mark the tripod joint and the halfshaft to make sure of
correct installation.
7. Remove the snap ring.
8. Remove the tripod joint.
9. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4771
10. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
11. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
12. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint.
13. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make
sure of correct installation.
14. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4772
15. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard.
16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft.
Assembly
NOTE: Make sure all components are clean and free of foreign material.
1. Lubricate the outboard CV joint with Ford High Temperature Constant Velocity Joint Grease
E43Z-19590-A or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESP-M1C207-A.
2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4773
3. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip.
4. Use a soft-face hammer to install the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft.
5. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot
forward onto the outboard CV joint.
6. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver
after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4774
7. Using the special tool, install two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
8. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
9. Install the snap ring.
10. Install the tripod joint on the halfshaft.
1. Line up the marks on the halfshaft and tripod Joint. 2. Install the tripod joint on the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4775
11. Install the snap ring.
12. Lubricate the three tripod joint needle bearings.
^ Use Ford High Temp Constant Velocity Joint Grease E43Z-19590-A or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESP-M1C207A.
13. Fill the tripod joint housing with Ford High Temp Constant Velocity Joint Grease E43Z-19590-A
or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESP-M1C207A.
14. Position the tripod housing onto the tripod.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4776
15. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
1. Position the inboard halfshaft boot. 2. Position the inboard halfshaft boot clamp.
16. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after
adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing.
17. Using the special tool, install two new outboard joint boot clamps.
18. Remove the halfshaft from the vise. 19. Install the front wheel halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4777
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshaft
Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the rear coil spring.
2. Remove and discard the nut.
3. CAUTION: Make sure to support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joints.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4778
4. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the knuckle.
5. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. Install the halfshaft into the differential.
2. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4779
3. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut.
4. Install the halfshaft nut. 5. Install the rear coil spring.
Disassembly and Assembly, Rear Half Shaft Joint
Halfshaft Joint
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. Secure the halfshaft and Constant Velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4780
3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps.
4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing.
5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner joint and the halfshaft to make sure of correct
installation.
6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inboard joint housing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4781
7. Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip.
8. Remove and discard the snap ring.
9. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
10. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
11. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4782
12. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make
sure of correct installation.
13. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft.
14. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard.
15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4783
16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft.
Assembly
1. Lubricate the inboard and outboard CV joint with joint grease.
2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot.
3. Install the snap ring on the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4784
4. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip.
5. Use a soft-face hammer to install the inboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft.
6. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot
forward onto the outboard CV joint.
7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver
after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing.
8. Using the special tool, crimp two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4785
9. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
10. Install the snap ring.
11. Install the bearing retainer circlip.
12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inboard joint.
13. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4786
14. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after
adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing.
15. Using the special tool, install two new inboard joint boot clamps. 16. Install the front wheel
halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing
Part 1 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4792
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4793
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4794
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4795
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4796
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint
stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4797
8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin.
11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4798
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing-4WD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4799
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4800
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS
6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4801
7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4802
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring.
^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4803
2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4804
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4805
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4806
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1. Install the bolt. 2. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS
13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4807
15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and
adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Indexing
Driveshaft Indexing
NOTE: If indexing the driveshaft does not eliminate the vibration, balance the driveshaft.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Remove the six front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers. ^
Discard the bolts and washers.
3. Rotate the flange 60 degrees.
4. Connect the front driveshaft and install the new bolts and washers.
5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts and straps or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4817
Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint. ^
Discard the bolts and straps.
6. Rotate the rear pinion yoke 180 degrees.
7. Connect the rear driveshaft and install new bolts and straps. 8. Lower the vehicle and test drive.
9. Repeat the procedure if necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4818
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the rear tires.
^ Install the lug nuts to retain the brake drums.
2. Check the rear driveshaft attachment. If there are any worn parts, new parts need to be installed.
3. Using the special tool, measure the runout at the front, the center, and the rear of the driveshaft.
4. If the runout measurements are within specifications, proceed to Step 13. 5. If the runout
measurements exceed the specifications at the front or the center, then install a new driveshaft. 6.
If the runout measurement exceeds the specifications at the rear, mark the rear runout high point
on the driveshaft. 7. Scribe alignment marks on the driveshaft and the axle pinion flange. 8. Index
the driveshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4819
9. Using the special tool, measure the runout at the rear of the driveshaft.
10. If the runout measurement still exceeds the specification at the rear, mark the rear runout high
point on the driveshaft. 11. If the runout measurement is within specifications, proceed to Step 13.
12. NOTE: Excessive driveshaft runout may originate in the driveshaft itself or in the axle pinion
flange.
Compare the two high points marked in Steps 6 and 10. ^
If the marks are within 25 mm (1 inch), then install a new driveshaft.
^ If the marks are not within 25 mm (1 inch), balance the driveshaft. Proceed to Step 13.
13. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, do not run the vehicle on the hoist for an extended period
of time.
^ Record baseline speed with the transmission in gear.
^ Increase the vehicle speed to the maximum vibration level.
^ Record the speed of the vibration as a baseline.
14. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
With the transmission in gear, run the vehicle with the driveshaft rotating 97 - 113 km/h (60 - 70
mph).
15. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
Have an assistant contact the driveshaft with a marker in the rear, middle and front end to indicate
heavy spots.
16. WARNING: Keep hands away from the balance weights while the driveshaft is rotating.
To balance the driveshaft, install two screw-type hose clamps on the driveshaft and rotate them in
90 degree intervals. Check the vibration for each position and place the screws at the position that
produces the least vibration.
17. Run the vehicle at the baseline speed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4820
18. If the vibration is still evident, rotate the clamps away from each other until the driveshaft is
balanced.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4821
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Driveshaft
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to
remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the
catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes
of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly 1. Place the selector lever in NEUTRAL 2. Raise and
support the vehicle.
Driveshaft assembly
3. Remove the ground strap bolt
4. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts and straps.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove the rear driveshaft universal joint caps 1
Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the rear of the driveshaft
2 Remove and discard the bolts and straps
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driveshaft Indexing > Page 4822
5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Remove the six front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers ^
Discard the bolts and washers
Driveshaft assembly
6. With the help of an assistant, remove the driveshaft.
^ Remove the center bearing nuts.
Front driveshaft
7. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and straps
or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove the front driveshaft. 1
Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
2 Remove and discard the bolts and caps.
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly
8. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index
the driveshaft.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications
Universal Joint: Specifications
Universal joint cap bolts .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4826
Universal Joint: Service and Repair
Universal Joint - Center and Rear
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for either of the center U-joint or the pinion yoke
U-joint. Install new bolts and straps or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
1. NOTE: Index the driveshaft yoke to the driveshaft.
Remove the driveshaft.
2. Clamp the special tool into a vise.
3. Remove the snap rings.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4827
4. Press out the bearing cups.
^ Rotate the driveshaft 180 degrees and repeat.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flex Plate to Torque Convertor Bolts
...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Nm (27 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Capacity ........................................................................................................
......................................................... 2.2L (2.32 qts.)
NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4842
Differential Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid Type
..........................................................................................................................................................
SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.3 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4847
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Type......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Flywheel Gear, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Flywheel Gear: Service and Repair
Removal
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. Remove the flywheel.
2. CAUTION: Tap the flywheel ring gear evenly to prevent binding.
Remove the flywheel ring gear from the flywheel. ^
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear and use brass drift to drive the flywheel ring gear off the
flywheel.
Installation
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. CAUTION: Do not heat the flywheel ring gear beyond 278°C (532°F). Use heat indicating
crayons to prevent overheating.
CAUTION: Keep the torch moving to prevent hot spots.
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear.
2. CAUTION: The bevel on the flywheel ring gear must face the rear of the flywheel.
Install the flywheel ring gear. ^
Use a brass drift to tap the flywheel ring gear into position.
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle LH Support Insulator
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Using the special tool, support the engine. 2. Remove the air cleaner.
3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator.
1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the four bolts. 3. Remove the LH transaxle support insulator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 4859
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Using the special tool, support the engine.
2. Remove the front transaxle support insulator bolt. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the transverse crossmember.
1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the transverse crossmember.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 4860
5. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1. Remove the splash shield screw. 2. Remove the bolts and the nut. 3. Remove the front-to-aft
crossmember.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle LH Support Insulator > Page 4861
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear transaxle support insulator.
1. Remove the bolt. 2. Remove the bolt and the nuts. 3. Remove the rear transaxle support
insulator.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Power Take-Off > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Power Take-Off: Description and Operation
POWER TAKE-OFF SWITCH AND CIRCUIT
Power Take-Off (PTO) Switch And Circuit To PCM
The Power Take-Off (PTO) circuit (Figure 47) is used by the PCM to disable some of the OBD II
Monitors during PTO operation. The PTO switch is normally open. When the PTO unit is activated
the PTO switch is closed and battery voltage is supplied to the PTO input circuit. This indicates to
the PCM that an additional load is being applied to the engine.
When the PTO unit is activated, the PCM disables some OBD-II monitors, which may not function
reliably during PTO operation. Without the PTO circuit information to the PCM, false Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) may be set during PTO operation. Prior to an Inspection/Maintenance test,
the vehicle will have to be operated with the PTO disengaged long enough to successfully
complete the OBD-II Monitors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4873
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4874
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4875
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4880
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4881
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4882
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4894
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4895
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4896
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 4901
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor > Page 4904
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4905
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4906
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4907
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4908
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4917
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4918
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4919
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4926
Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity
POWER TRANSFER UNIT..................................................................................................................
............................................. 12 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4931
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............................. SAE 75W-140 High Performance
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 4932
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair
CAUTION: New transfer case lubricant must be installed any time the transfer case has been
submerged in water.
NOTE: The transfer case is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected
or a repair IS necessary.
1. Remove the drain plug and drain the transfer case.
2. Apply sealant to the drain plug threads and install the plug.
3. CAUTION: Transfer case failure can result if the correct fill procedures are not followed.
NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level
ground.
Remove the fill plug and fill the transfer case with SAE 75W-140 synthetic gear lubricant.
4. Apply sealant to the fill plug and install the plug.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4936
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4937
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4938
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4942
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4943
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4944
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4949
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4950
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4951
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the companion flange.
2. Remove the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal. 2. Install the
companion flange. 3. Fill the transfer case.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4956
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Inner Halfshaft Seal
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
3. Using the special tools, remove the driven gear seal.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4957
1. NOTE: Clean the inside of the driven gear of foreign material prior to installation.
Using the special tools, install the driven gear seal.
2. Install the transfer case. 3. Fill the transfer case. 4. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4958
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If the transfer case is leaking automatic transmission fluid, install a new transfer case driven
gear seal.
1. Remove the exhaust system crossover pipe.
2. Remove the heat shield.
^ Remove the 3 bolts.
3. Remove the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4959
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. Remove and discard the RH halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Press the RH halfshaft seal until it is flush with the transfer case cover.
Using the special tools, install the RH halfshaft seal.
2. NOTE: Press the dust shield to snap it into position.
Install the dust shield.
3. NOTE: Clean the intermediate shaft before assembly. Use 600 grit sandpaper on seal journals
and wipe dry.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4960
Install the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
4. Install the heat shield.
^ Install the 3 bolts.
5. Install the exhaust system 6. Check the transfer case oil level. 7. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4961
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Driven Gear Seal
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
3. Remove the transfer case vent tube.
^ Remove the two bolts.
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. CAUTION: The transfer case cover is located to the case using two hollow dowels. Remove the
cover squarely from the dowels to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4962
cracking the cover bosses.
Remove the bolts and the transfer case cover.
6. Remove the three gears.
7. Remove the inner seal.
8. CAUTION: Transfer case cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of grease prior to
applying new silicone sealant.
Clean the transfer case sealing surfaces.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the inner seal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4963
2. CAUTION: Take care not to roll the transfer case inner halfshaft seal lip when installing the drive
gear.
Install the three gears. 1. Install the drive gear.
^ Install the drive gear using a slight rotation to prevent damaging the transfer case inner halfshaft
seal.
2. Install the idler gear. 3. Install the driven gear.
3. CAUTION: The transfer case cover must be installed within 15 minutes of applying the silicone
sealant. If the time limit is exceeded, clean the
sealing surfaces and reapply.
NOTE: Apply a 1/8-inch bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the sealing surface of the transfer
case cover before installing on the transfer case.
Install the transfer case cover. ^
Install the bolts in a cross pattern.
4. Install a new dust shield.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4964
5. Install the transfer case vent tube.
^ Install the bolts.
6. Install the transfer case. 7. Fill the transfer case. 8. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4965
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the companion flange.
2. Remove the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal. 2. Install the
companion flange. 3. Fill the transfer case.
Transfer Case Inner Halfshaft Seal
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4966
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
3. Using the special tools, remove the driven gear seal.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4967
1. NOTE: Clean the inside of the driven gear of foreign material prior to installation.
Using the special tools, install the driven gear seal.
2. Install the transfer case. 3. Fill the transfer case. 4. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If the transfer case is leaking automatic transmission fluid, install a new transfer case driven
gear seal.
1. Remove the exhaust system crossover pipe.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4968
2. Remove the heat shield.
^ Remove the 3 bolts.
3. Remove the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. Remove and discard the RH halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Press the RH halfshaft seal until it is flush with the transfer case cover.
Using the special tools, install the RH halfshaft seal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4969
2. NOTE: Press the dust shield to snap it into position.
Install the dust shield.
3. NOTE: Clean the intermediate shaft before assembly. Use 600 grit sandpaper on seal journals
and wipe dry.
Install the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
4. Install the heat shield.
^ Install the 3 bolts.
5. Install the exhaust system 6. Check the transfer case oil level. 7. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Transfer Case Driven Gear Seal
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4970
3. Remove the transfer case vent tube.
^ Remove the two bolts.
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. CAUTION: The transfer case cover is located to the case using two hollow dowels. Remove the
cover squarely from the dowels to avoid
cracking the cover bosses.
Remove the bolts and the transfer case cover.
6. Remove the three gears.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4971
7. Remove the inner seal.
8. CAUTION: Transfer case cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of grease prior to
applying new silicone sealant.
Clean the transfer case sealing surfaces.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the inner seal.
2. CAUTION: Take care not to roll the transfer case inner halfshaft seal lip when installing the drive
gear.
Install the three gears. 1. Install the drive gear.
^ Install the drive gear using a slight rotation to prevent damaging the transfer case inner halfshaft
seal.
2. Install the idler gear. 3. Install the driven gear.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4972
3. CAUTION: The transfer case cover must be installed within 15 minutes of applying the silicone
sealant. If the time limit is exceeded, clean the
sealing surfaces and reapply.
NOTE: Apply a 1/8-inch bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the sealing surface of the transfer
case cover before installing on the transfer case.
Install the transfer case cover. ^
Install the bolts in a cross pattern.
4. Install a new dust shield.
5. Install the transfer case vent tube.
^ Install the bolts.
6. Install the transfer case. 7. Fill the transfer case. 8. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Transfer Case-Removal
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Drain the transfer case. 3. Remove the driveshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4973
4. Remove the 4 bolts and the crossmember brace. 5. Remove the generator. 6. Disconnect the
RH catalyst monitor.
7. Remove and discard the 2 nuts and separate the flexible Y-pipe from the manifold.
8. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
9. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4974
10. Remove the flexible pipe.
^ Disconnect the hanger.
11. Disconnect the EGR valve to exhaust manifold tube at the manifold. 12. Disconnect the RH
heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
13. Remove the RH exhaust manifold.
^ Discard the gasket.
14. Remove the bracket.
1. Remove the five bolts. 2. Loosen the bolt. 3. Remove the bracket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4975
15. Remove the 3 bolts.
16. CAUTION: The transfer case driven gear seal must be replaced whenever the linkshaft or
transfer case is removed from the vehicle.
NOTE: If necessary, replace the RH differential fluid seal.
Remove the bolt and the transfer case.
Transfer Case-Installation
Installation
1. CAUTION: The transfer case driven gear seal must be replaced whenever the linkshaft or
transfer case is removed from the vehicle.
NOTE: If necessary, replace the RH differential fluid seal.
Install the transfer case. ^
Install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4976
2. Install the bolt.
3. Install the bracket and the 6 bolts. 4. Install the RH exhaust manifold.
5. Connect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S).
6. Connect the EGR to exhaust manifold tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4977
7. Install the flex pipe and connect the hanger.
8. Install the gasket and the nuts.
9. Install the gasket and the nuts.
10. Connect the flexible Y-pipe to the exhaust manifold and install the two nuts. 11. Connect the
RH catalyst monitor sensor. 12. Install the generator.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4978
13. Instal the crossmember brace and the four bolts. 14. Check the transfer case fluid level. 15.
Install the driveshaft. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4983
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4984
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4985
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Locations > Page 4996
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5007
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5008
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5009
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5014
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5015
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5016
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The transmission control switch (TCS) (Figure 50) and (Figure 51) signals the PCM with keypower
whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp
(TCIL) lights when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. The operator of the vehicle controls
the position of the TCS.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5028
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5029
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Special Tools And Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor.
1. Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolts. 3. Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the transmission range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5030
2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray, check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
NOTE: When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the vehicle must relearn its
adaptive shift strategy. During this relearning process shifts might be slightly firm, early or delayed.
This operation is normal and will not affect the function or durability of the transaxle. Normal
operation will return once these transaxle parameters are stored by the vehicle PCM.
Install the battery and tray.
4. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should
illuminate in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5035
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5038
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5039
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Material
Materials
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5040
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range
selector lever through all gear positions.
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5041
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5042
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5051
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5052
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation
4X4 MODE SWITCH
Typical 4X4 Switch
The generic electronic module (GEM) or the 4x4 module (4x4M) provides the PCM with an
indication of 4x4L. This input is used to adjust the shift schedule. A 5.0 volt module pull-up
indicates 4x4H or 2WD (Figure 53).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5053
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the mode select switch (MSS) knob. 2. Remove the instrument panel center finish
panel.
3. Remove the MSS.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the MSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Diode >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5065
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5066
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module - Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications
Control module bolts ............................................................................................................................
............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.) Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1)
...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Outlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1)
.................................................................................................................................................... 18
Nm (13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5070
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5071
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5076
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5077
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5078
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5081
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5082
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5083
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5086
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5087
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5088
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5089
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front
Sensor Indicator - Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5090
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear
Sensor Indicator - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15
minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink
water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 5095
Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the
paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the
battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5098
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5099
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5100
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5101
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise.
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5102
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5103
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5104
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment.
Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the
brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the
adapter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5105
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
Brake Pedal
Pedal free play .....................................................................................................................................
..................................... 7.8-12 mm (0.3-0.47 inch) Brake pedal bracket nuts ....................................
................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 5109
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments
Brake Pedal Pedal free play mm (inch) ...............................................................................................
............................................................................ 7.8-12 (0.3-0.47)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 5110
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 2. If equipped, remove the speed control
deactivator switch.
3. Disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal pin.
^ Remove the cotter pin and bushing.
4. Remove the brake pedal and bracket.
^ Remove the nuts.
5. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications
Rear anti-lock brake sensor bolt
..............................................................................................................................................................
9 Nm (80 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Disc brake caliper bleeder screws
.............................................................................................................................................................
16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) ....................................................................
.............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate
bolts
...........................................................................................................................................................
150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts .............................................................................................
....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts
2 Position the caliper aside
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5120
with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action.
This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic
system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5121
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must
be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5122
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and
may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore
NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5123
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake pad minimum thickness .............................................................................................................
.................................................. 3.0 mm (0.118 inch) Brake pad maximum thickness variation
(pad-to-pad) .......................................................................................................................... 2.0 mm
(0.079 inch) Brake pad maximum taper wear (in any direction)
................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm (0.118
inch)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5127
Brake Pad: Service and Repair
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to
health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the brake pads.
^ Remove the outer brake pad from the anchor
^ Remove the inner brake pad from the caliper piston
5. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc Specifications
Brake disc minimum thickness
.........................................................................................................................................................
22.0 mm (0.86 inch) Brake disc minimum thickness to machine
....................................................................................................................................... 22.6 mm
(0.88 inch) Rotor mount mm (in) ..........................................................................................................
........................................................................... 0.05 (0.002) Front disc brake rotor Runout mm (in)
............................................................................................................................................................
0.1 (0.004) Front disc brake rotor thickness mm (in)
.............................................................................................................................................. 22-24
(0.87-0.94)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front
Brake Disc
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
2. Remove the brake disc retaining clips (if equipped) and the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front > Page 5133
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Brake Disc Machining
Brake Disc Machining
Special Tool(s)
Material
Brake Disc Machining
CAUTION: Do not use a bench lathe to machine brake discs.
NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and view the video shipped with the lathe before
installing, operating, or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: If the thickness of the brake disc is less than the minimum thickness to machine
specification, install a new brake disc. This will make sure that the brake disc will be above
minimum thickness after machining.
NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line from the brake caliper.
Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket aside.
2. For vehicles with a two-piece brake disc and hub assembly:
1 Mark the brake disc and the wheel stud for correct indexing during re-assembly.
2 Remove the brake disc from the hub.
3 CAUTION: Do not use an abrasive sanding disc since it will remove paint or other protective
finishes from the wheel or metal from the mounting surfaces, adversely affecting corrosion
protection and brake disc lateral runout.
Remove corrosion from the wheel mounting surface, both disc mounting surfaces, and hub
mounting surface.
4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub.
3. Machine the brake disc using an on-car brake lathe.
1 Install the hub adapter and silencer belt, if necessary.
2 Install the cutting lathe.
3 If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. Total indicated
reading (TIR) target is 0.000 mm (0.000 inch), maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch).
4 Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits, and install the chip deflector.
5 NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter
cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface
finish.
Machine the brake disc.
6 Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt.
7 Remove the hub adapter.
4. Remove metal shavings.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Front > Page 5134
5. For vehicles with a two-piece brake disc and hub assembly:
1 Remove the brake disc from the hub.
2 Remove metal shavings from the hub, the brake disc mounting surfaces and from the ABS
sensors.
3 Apply anti-seize lubricant to hub mounting surface to prevent corrosion.
4 Align the match marks and install the brake disc on the hub.
6. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material properties are within
guidelines.
Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Backing Plate: Specifications
Brake backing plate bolts ....................................................................................................................
..................................................... 66 Nm (49 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5139
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
4. Remove the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Rear Brake Drum
Maximum inside diameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
230.10 mm (9.0590 inch)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5143
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust can be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies must be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos filters, such as brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be
labeled per the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) instructions, sealed, and the trash
hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning must be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians must wear government-approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requires where asbestos dust
generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians carrying out
brake or clutch repair are to be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both
ends of an axle.
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly.
2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
3. If the brake drums will not come off follow these steps.
1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw
2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5144
4. Using the special tool. measure the brake drum inside diameter.
^ Install a new brake drum if the maximum inside diameter exceeds the specification shown on the
outside of the brake drum.
Installation
1. NOTE: If adjusting the rear brakes refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment.
Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
2. WARNING: Whenever a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign material
present on the mounting surfaces of
the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, causing loss of
control. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Clean the wheel hub mounting surface and wheel pilot.
3. Install the tire and wheel assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake shoe minimum thickness ...........................................................................................................
.................................................... 1.0 mm (0.03 inch)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5148
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the
brake drum.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5149
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Use the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum to remove brake dust and dirt
from the brake assemblies.
3. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed. resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to ensure an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing wild also correct out-of-round and bell conditions.
Inning the special tool, measure the braking surface diameter. If the inside diameter measures
more than the maximum specification shown on the outside of the brake drum. install a new brake
drum.
4. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
5. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5150
6. Remove the lower spring.
7. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
8. Remove the self adjuster lever.
9. Remove the self adjuster and spring assembly.
^ Return the self adjuster to the fully seated position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5151
10. Remove the parking brake lever.
1 Remove the horseshoe clip.
2 Remove the parking brake lever.
11. Inspect the rear brake shoes for minimum thickness above the backing plate, and install new as
necessary. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in)
............................................................................................................................................................
23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting
................................................................................................................................................... 14
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................
............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5157
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5158
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap.
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots.
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Brake Bleeding: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush the eyes for 15
minutes with cold running water. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink
water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 5164
Brake Bleeding: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level surface. If brake fluid is spilled on the
paintwork, the affected areas must be immediately washed down with cold water. Make sure the
battery ground cable is disconnected on vehicles fitted with Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5167
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5168
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5169
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5170
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder - Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise.
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission, plug the master cylinder feed port.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5171
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses. 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines.
Brake Master Cylinder - In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5172
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5173
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment.
Follow the instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install Brake Bleeder to the
brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the
adapter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5174
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Disc brake caliper bleeder screws
.............................................................................................................................................................
16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) ....................................................................
.............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate
bolts
...........................................................................................................................................................
150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts .............................................................................................
....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts
2 Position the caliper aside
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5180
with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action.
This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic
system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5181
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must
be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5182
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and
may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore
NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5183
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type ......................................................................................................................... High
Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5190
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Hose/Line: Specifications
Brake line master cylinder fittings
............................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Disc brake caliper bleeder screws
.............................................................................................................................................................
16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Wheel cylinder bleeder screws ..............................................................................
.................................................................................. 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications
Control module bolts ............................................................................................................................
............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.) Inlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1)
...................................................................................................................................................... 17
Nm (13 ft. lbs.) Outlet brake line to HCU nuts (M12-1)
.................................................................................................................................................... 18
Nm (13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5197
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5198
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications
Brake line master cylinder fittings
...........................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Brake master cylinder ............................................................................................
................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Master cylinder nuts ...........
..............................................................................................................................................................
........ 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5202
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Test
1. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 2.
Observe the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir as the brake pedal is slowly
pressed and quickly released. If the brake fluid
level rises when the brake pedal is pressed and drops when the brake pedal is released, but the
net brake fluid level remains unchanged, the brake master cylinder is bypassing. Repair or install a
new brake master cylinder.
Brake Master Cylinder - Non-Pressure External Leaks
A low brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by the following
non-pressure external leaks:
Type 1. An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder filler cap due to incorrect position of
the cap, cap gasket, or cap gasket deterioration.
Type 2. An external leak may exist at the brake master cylinder mounting flange due to internal
seal failure. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder.
Type 3. An external leak may exist at the base of the brake master cylinder reservoir due to
deteriorated reservoir mounting seals. Repair or install a new brake master cylinder.
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port Check
The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^
Supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system
due to brake shoe and lining wear.
^ Allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released.
The returning brake fluid will create a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir . This
is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged.
Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged
compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Raise and support the vehicle; refer to
Vehicle Lifting. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel. If an excessive amount
of brake drag exists, continue with the test. If an excessive
amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized rear disc brake
caliper, front disc brake caliper, rear wheel cylinder, or parking brake component. Repair or install
new components as necessary.
3. Check the brake pedal position (BPP) switch adjustment, and brake pedal free play to verify that
the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. Loosen the nuts attaching the brake master cylinder to
the power brake booster and pull the brake master cylinder away from the power brake
booster.
5. Repeat Steps 1 and 2. If the brake drag disappears, the power brake booster is binding and new
one must be installed. If the brake drag
continues, the brake master cylinder is binding and new one must be installed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector 2. Using a suitable suction
device drain the brake master cylinder reservoir
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Disconnect the brake lines and plug the lines and the brake master cylinder ports.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5205
5. NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must
be installed.
Remove the nuts and the brake master cylinder.
6. NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Lubricate
the new seals with clean brake fluid.
Transfer the brake master cylinder reservoir if a new master cylinder is to be installed. 1
Lubricate the two O-ring seals with clean brake fluid and insert into the brake master cylinder.
2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the O-ring seals until it snaps into the brake master
cylinder securely.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the master cylinder.
^ If equipped with manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5206
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake master cylinder. 2. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
4. Remove the seals.
5. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5207
6. Remove the primary and secondary piston.
7. NOTE: If the brake master cylinder bore is damaged a new brake master cylinder must be
installed.
Use isopropyl alcohol to clean and inspect the brake master cylinder bore for damage.
Assembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Use clean brake fluid to lubricate the new piston assembly seals and the brake master cylinder
bore.
2. Install the secondary piston assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5208
3. Install the primary piston assembly
4. Install the snap ring.
5. Install the seals
^ Lubricate the seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
6. Install the brake master cylinder reservoir.
^ Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
7. Install master cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5209
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the fluid level electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Installation
NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5210
1. Install the new brake master cylinder reservoir.
1 Lubricate the two seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
3 Connect the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. If equipped with manual transmission, connect the clutch master cylinder feed.
^ Bleed the clutch master cylinder.
3. Bleed the master cylinder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in)
............................................................................................................................................................
23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting
................................................................................................................................................... 14
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................
............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5216
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5217
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap.
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots.
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications
Parking Brake Cable: Specifications
Parking brake cable bracket bolt .........................................................................................................
...................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Parking brake cable equalizer bracket bolt
.............................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80
inch lbs.) Rear parking brake cable bracket bolts
..................................................................................................................................................... 23
Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Rear parking brake cable to knuckle bracket bolts
................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5222
Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable Adjustment
Vehicle with low series floor console
1. Remove the floor console front finish panel.
1 If equipped, remove the manual transmission shift knob by turning counterclockwise.
2 Remove the floor console front finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
Vehicle with high series floor console
3. Remove the floor console finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console finish panel.
All vehicles
4. Remove the adjustment nut clip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5223
5. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut so that the parking brake control stroke is three to
five notches when pulled. 6. Confirm the parking brake is applied. 7. Install the adjustment nut clip.
Vehicle with high series floor console
8. Install the floor console rear finish panel.
Vehicle with low series floor console
9. Install the floor console rear finish panel.
10. Install the floor console front finish panel.
^ If equipped, install the manual transmission shifter knob by turning clockwise.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Front
Removal and Installation
All Vehicles
1. Remove the parking brake control.
With Floor Console
2. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket.
Without Floor Console
3. Remove the LH front seat.
4. Remove the LH front door scuff plate. 5. Remove the LH lower A-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the
LH front safety belt. 7. Pull back carpet to gain access to the console bracket. 8. Remove the two
bolts and the floor console bracket.
All Vehicles
9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the front parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the RH side rear parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the parking brake cable equalizer.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5226
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Rear
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes.
ABS-equipped vehicles
2. Remove the ABS cable bracket bolt.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear parking brake cable to trailing arm bracket bolts.
4. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable from the backing plates.
5. Remove the rear parking brake cable bracket bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5227
6. Remove the RH side rear parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the front parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable
support bracket.
7. Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable to fuel tank support strap.
8. Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
9. Remove the LH rear parking brake cable.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable support
bracket.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Specifications
Parking Brake Control: Specifications
Parking brake control bolts ..................................................................................................................
..................................................... 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5231
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Release the parking brake control.
3. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut.
5. Remove the parking brake control.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5235
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5236
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5241
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The brake booster consists of the following components: ^
power brake booster
^ vacuum booster hose
^ power brake booster check valve
The power brake booster reduces the effort required to push the brake pedal to actuate the brakes
The vacuum booster hose supplies vacuum to the brake booster.
The vacuum booster check valve closes when the engine is turned off and traps engine vacuum in
the power brake booster.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5242
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster - Operation Check
1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors must be capped.
Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured
and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas.
2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3.
With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking
brake.
4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, a new component must
be installed.
Press the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum from the system.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake
pedal will move downward under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the
power brake booster system is not functioning.
7. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK
(A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should
be available from
the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose
connections. Repair as necessary.
9. Reconnect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds.
10. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with
approximately 89 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal
power assisted brake
operation for at least one application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, then the power brake
booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test.
12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum
does not leak off after 10 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the vacuum does leak off,
install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hoses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5243
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the brake pedal push rod cotter pin and washer.
2. Remove the four power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts.
3. Disconnect the brake pedal pushrod.
3.0 L (4V)
4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve and position it aside.
1 Disconnect the cable locator.
2 Remove the nuts.
3 Position the evaporative emission canister purge valve aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5244
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the master cylinder and position aside.
^ Remove the nuts
^ Position the master cylinder aside.
6. Remove the brake booster.
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose.
2 Remove the brake booster.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check Valve
1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after ten minutes, the check
valve is OK.
Otherwise, install a new check valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5252
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5253
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module - Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5258
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5262
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5263
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5268
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5269
View 151-27
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5270
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5273
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5274
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5275
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Front
Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5278
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5279
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor, Rear
Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the bolt.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5280
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the bolt and the sensor.
7. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5281
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Front
Sensor Indicator - Front
Removal and Installation
1. The front anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor, Front > Page 5282
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor Ring, Rear
Sensor Indicator - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. The rear anti-lock brake sensor indicator is attached to the halfshaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5288
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5296
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5301
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5302
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5303
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
BATTERY CABLES
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
3. Remove the fuse junction box cover.
4. Remove the cables.
1 Remove the nuts and cable.
2 Release the lock clip and pull down on the connector.
5. Remove the bolt from the inner fender bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5308
6. Remove the battery ground cable bolt and the cable from the top of the transaxle.
7. Disconnect the harness clip retainer.
8. Remove the cable ends from starter solenoid.
1 Remove the upper nut.
2 Remove the lower nut.
9. Remove the cable harness from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
ITEM.....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................SPECIFICATIONS
Output Amps.........................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................110
Generator
Base Voltage........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................12.0 volts No Load at 2000 rpm..........................................
..........................................................................................................................between 13.0 - 15.0
volts Load at 2000 rpm.........................................................................................................................
....................minimum of 0.5 volt above the base voltage
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5314
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views
Alternator: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views > Page 5317
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5318
Alternator: Description and Operation
GENERATOR
The charging system consists of the following components:
- generator
- integral voltage regulator
The generator maximum output provides 110 amps.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5319
Alternator: Service and Repair
GENERATOR
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the right intermediate axle shaft.
3. Remove the right lower splash shield screws and the pin-type retainer.
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Remove the nut and position the bracket and wiring harness aside.
6. Remove the upper generator mounting bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5320
7. Remove the lower generator bolts and position the generator aside.
8. Remove the generator mounting bracket bolts and remove the bracket.
9. Remove the generator electrical connectors.
1 Remove the B+ nut and cable.
2 Remove the connector.
10. Rotate the generator to gain clearance, and remove through the opening in the fender well.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5325
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Ignition Lock: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5336
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Starter Drive/Bendix > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Starter Drive/Bendix: Testing and Inspection
STARTER DRIVE AND FLYWHEEL RING GEAR INSPECTION
1. Remove the starter motor.
2. Check the wear patterns on the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear. If the wear pattern
is normal, install the starter motor.
3. If the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear are not fully meshing and both of the gears are
scored or damaged, install a new starter motor.
If necessary, install a new flywheel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5344
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5345
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5346
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear > Page 5352
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5363
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5364
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5365
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5366
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5369
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5370
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5371
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5372
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5377
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5378
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5379
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5380
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5383
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5384
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5385
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5386
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5389
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5390
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5391
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5392
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Ground Strap: Service and Repair
GROUND STRAP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables.
2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar.
Remove the ground strap. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5399
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5403
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5412
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5413
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5414
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5415
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5416
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5422
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5423
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5424
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5425
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5426
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5429
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5430
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5431
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5432
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5433
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5434
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5435
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5436
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5437
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5438
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5439
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5440
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5441
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5442
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5443
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5444
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5445
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5446
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5450
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5451
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5452
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5457
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5461
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5465
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5466
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5467
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5472
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5473
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5474
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5475
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5478
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5479
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5480
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5481
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5484
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5485
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5486
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5487
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5492
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5493
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5494
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5495
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5498
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5499
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5500
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5501
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5504
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5505
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5506
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5507
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5521
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5522
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5523
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5524
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5525
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5526
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5527
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5528
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5529
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 >
SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5539
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5540
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5541
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5542
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5543
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5544
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5545
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5546
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5547
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Rear > Page 5553
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5564
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5565
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5566
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5567
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5570
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5571
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5572
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5573
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5578
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5579
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5580
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5581
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5584
Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5585
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5586
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5587
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5590
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5591
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5592
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5593
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ground Strap: Service and Repair
GROUND STRAP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables.
2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar.
Remove the ground strap. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5600
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5604
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5613
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5614
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5615
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5616
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5617
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5623
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5624
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5625
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5626
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5627
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5630
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5631
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5632
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5633
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5634
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5635
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5636
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5637
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5638
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5639
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5640
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5641
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5642
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5643
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5644
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5645
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5646
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5647
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5651
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5652
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 5653
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5658
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5662
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5666
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5667
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5668
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5673
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5674
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5675
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5676
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5679
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5680
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5681
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5682
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5685
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5686
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5687
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5688
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5693
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5694
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5695
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5696
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5699
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5700
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box (CJB)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5701
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5702
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5705
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5706
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5707
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5708
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5722
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5723
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5724
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5725
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5726
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5727
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5728
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5729
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5730
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5740
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5741
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5742
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5743
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5744
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5745
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5746
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5747
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5748
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5758
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5759
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5760
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5761
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5767
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5768
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5769
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5770
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 5771
Alignment Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 5772
Alignment: Description and Operation
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at the top,
then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is negative (-).
Caster
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 5773
Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe in). When the
wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is measured
in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5776
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5777
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5778
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5779
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary.
Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference.
3. Remove the higher side coil spring.
1. If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle. 2. If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 in),
remove the low side coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5785
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure Switch > Page 5788
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5789
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Power Steering System Purging
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power
steering pump failure can result. The condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of
aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump can be caused by air in the system. The
power steering purge procedure must be carried out
prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by
evidence of aerated fluid.
Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid.
2. Raise the front wheels off the floor. 3. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the
reservoir. 4. Start the engine. 5. Install the vacuum pump and maintain maximum vacuum, 68-85
kPa (20-25 in-Hg).
6. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a
time. Damage to the power steering pump can
occur.
Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop to stop 10 times.
7. Stop the engine. 8. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump.
9. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir.
Fill the reservoir. ^
Use approved transmission fluid.
10. Start the engine. 11. Reinstall the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain maximum vacuum, 68-85
kPa (20-25 Hg).
12. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than 3 to 5 seconds at a
time. Damage to the power steering pump can
occur.
Cycle the steering wheel fully from stop to stop 10 times.
13. Stop the engine, release the vacuum, and remove the vacuum pump.
14. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir.
Fill the reservoir as needed and install the reservoir cap.
15. Visually inspect the power steering system for leaks. 16. Lower the vehicle.
17. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir.
Fill the reservoir as needed and visually inspect the power steering system for leaks.
18. Install the reservoir cap.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 5799
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5800
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................
.................................................. MERCON(R) ATF
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Specifications
Power steering fluid cooler mounting bolts
.......................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5804
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the hose from the power steering fluid reservoir.
Vehicles built before 10/1/2003
2. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose.
Vehicles built after 10/1/2003
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering fluid return hose. 4. Remove the power
steering fluid cooler bracket nuts.
All Vehicles 5. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the bolts and the power steering fluid cooler. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Specifications
Power steering pump fluid reservoir mounting bolts
............................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5808
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pain.
Disconnect the power steering fluid return hose.
2. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
3. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump reservoir. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting
..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.)
Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting
............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48
ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt
.................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering
pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt
........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power
steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt
................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch
lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt
..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. Remove the power steering pressure hose.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5814
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
2. Install the power steering pressure hose.
1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt.
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5815
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications
Power steering pump pulley nut ..........................................................................................................
..................................................... 49 Nm (36 ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket-to-pump bolts
........................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket mounting nuts
........................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5820
Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Power Steering Pump
Flow (1) ................................................................................................................................................
................... 6-8.25 liters/minute (1.79-2.19 gpm) Pressure (1) ...........................................................
.................................................................................................................................. 414 kPa (60 psi)
Relief pressure
.........................................................................................................................................................
8,964- 10,205 kPa (1,300-1,480 psi)
(1)Fluid 74°-80° C (165°-175° F) Engine at idle
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5821
Power Steering Pump: Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Pump
Minimum capacity (1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
4.4 liters/minute (1.15 8pm)
(1) Fluid @ 74°-80° C (165°-175° F). Engine at idle. Pressure at 5,171 kPa (750 psi)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the ground strap.
^ Remove the nut and the ground strap.
2. Using the special tools, support the engine.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5824
3. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 4. Remove the drive belt.
5. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley.
6. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
7. Disconnect the power steering pressure hose and position aside.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Disconnect the power steering pressure line and position aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5825
8. Remove the upper engine insulator bracket bolt.
9. Remove the A/C line support nut.
10. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity.
Remove the engine insulator. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt and the engine insulator.
11. Remove the power steering pump bracket.
1 Remove the pressure line bracket screw.
2 Remove the six nuts.
3 Remove five bolts and the power steering pump bracket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5826
12. Remove the power steering pump.
Installation
1. Position the power steering pump.
2. Install the power steering pump bracket.
1 Install the five bolts.
2 Install the six nuts.
3 Install the pressure line bracket screw.
3. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity.
Install the engine insulator. 1
Install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5827
2 Install the nut.
4. Install the upper engine insulator bracket bolt.
5. Position the A/C line support and install the nut.
6. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
7. Connect the power steering pressure hose.
1 Connect the power steering pressure hose to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5828
8. Connect the power steering low pressure hose.
9. Install the power steering pump pulley and bolt.
10. Install the drive belt.
11. Tighten the power steering pump pulley bolt.
12. Remove the special tools.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5829
13. Install the ground strap.
^ Position the ground strap and install the nut.
14. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5830
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley
Power Steering Pump Pulley
Removal and Installation
1. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 2. Remove the drive belt.
3. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5835
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The power steering pressure (PSP) switch (Figure 45) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic
pressure increases. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Page 5838
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Sensor
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The power steering pressure (PSP) sensor (Figure 46) monitors the hydraulic pressure within the
power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM will change as the hydraulic
pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for
additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle rpm and preventing engine stall during parking
maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust transmission electronic pressure
control (EPC) pressure during the increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5839
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the power steering pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5846
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5847
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5848
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5849
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5850
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5851
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications
Steering Gear: Specifications
Power Steering Gear
Turning effort .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 30 Nm (6.75 lb)
Steering gear mounting bolts ...............................................................................................................
................................................... 126 Nm (93 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar.
Remove the rear transaxle insulator. 1
Remove the bolts and nuts.
2 Remove the rear transaxle insulator.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 2. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle
insulator bracket.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5857
All vehicles 3. Remove the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 4. Remove the
front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission 5. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator
bracket.
All vehicles
6. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Remove the tie rod end nut. 1
Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
7. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5858
Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
8. NOTE: Record the number of turns required to remove the tie rod end.
Remove the tie rod ends and the tie rod end jam nuts.
9. Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
1 Slide the boot up.
2 Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
10. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
11. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5859
12. Remove the steering shaft.
13. Remove the steering shaft boot.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the steering shaft boot.
14. NOTE: LH shown; RH similar.
Remove the two steering gear mounting bolts.
15. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear forward to separate the steering coupling
from the steering gear shaft. Remove the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear rearward to connect the steering
coupling to the steering gear shaft.
Position the steering gear in the vehicle.
2. Lower the hoist.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5860
3. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. 4. Install the steering shaft boot.
5. Install the steering shaft.
6. Install the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 7. Raise the vehicle on the
hoist.
8. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5861
9. Install the steering gear coupling pinch bolt and slide the boot down.
10. Thread the tie rod end jam nuts onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
11. NOTE: Use the numbers recorded from removal to install the tie rod ends.
Thread the tie rod ends onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
12. Tighten the tie rod end jam nuts.
13. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Connect the tie rod end to the knuckle. 1
Install the nut.
2 Install the cotter pin.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5862
14. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
15. Install the front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission
16. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
17. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar.
Install the rear transaxle insulator.
18. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. 19. Align the front wheels to
specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5863
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Position the steering gear boot cover aside.
2. NOTE: The nut cannot be reused. Install a new nut.
Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 1
Remove and discard the nut.
2 Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling.
3. Remove the steering gear boot.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Position the front seats rearward.
2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
3. Lower the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Turn the pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from the column shaft.
5. Remove the steering wheel.
- Position the steering wheel rearward.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5867
1. Install the steering wheel.
- Connect the electrical connector.
- Position the steering wheel onto the steering column shaft.
2. Tighten the pinion shaft.
3. Close the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Tie Rod End: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Article No. 03-15-13
08/04/03
STEERING - TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1997-2003 F-150 2001-2004 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
This article supersedes 03-9-9 to update the vehicle models covered.
ISSUE This article is to be used as an updated procedure for inspecting tie rod end wear.
ACTION This procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual, as it provides a more
detailed tie rod end inspection procedure.
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE
FOR ESCAPE VEHICLES, THIS TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE
COMPLETED ON THE OUTER TIE RODS. FOR ESCAPE INNER TIE ROD INSPECTION
PROCEDURES, REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 211-00.
Step 1 - Free Play:
Check the outer tie rod ends by grasping by hand and push up and down. Check the inner tie rod
ends, pushing them front to rear. If any free play is observed in a joint, it is worn and should be
replaced.
Step 2 - Stud Lash - Free Play:
While vehicle is on the ground or on a drive-on hoist, have an assistant rotate the steering wheel
rapidly back and forth from 10 o'clock to 2 o'clock to 10 o'clock while observing the inner and outer
tie rods. If the outer tie rod ends have any vertical movement or the inner tie rod ends have any
horizontal movement, the tie rod end with the observed movement should be replaced.
Step 3 - Seal Inspection:
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and remove the front wheels. The wheels will need to be turned to the
right in order to inspect the passenger side inner tie rod end and to the left to inspect the drivers
side inner tie rod end. Inspect all four seals for tears, perforations and wear. If there is any
indication of wear or perforations on the seal, that tie rod end should be replaced.
Step 4 - Stud Corrosion:
For Escape Vehicles - If Squeak is noticed during Step 2, disconnect tie rod from knuckle and
articulate stud in socket. If squeak is verified, replace part. While pushing down on seal, at stud
end, if corrosion present at contact point at base of stud, replace part.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 5873
For All Other Vehicles Covered In This Article:
Using a wrench, rotate the tie rod end so that the front of the seal on the outer tie rod end is
expanded (Figure 1). Using a puffy knife or other hard, flat, dull object, lift the bottom of the seal up,
exposing the stud (Figure 2). If any water escapes from the seal in the form of bubbles or in a liquid
form, that tie rod end should be replaced. Closely examine the stud for signs of corrosion,
especially around the interface with the knuckle. A rag might be needed to clean off any grease on
the stud that impairs a good visual inspection. If there is any sign of corrosion, that tie rod end
should be replaced.
Rotate the tie rod end in the opposite direction to expand the inner tie rod seal. Repeat the
inspection procedure used on the outer tie rod. Repeat this entire procedure on the other side of
the vehicle. If there is sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced.
NOTE
IF ANY TIE ROD ENDS ARE REMOVED, INSPECT THE SEAL AND THE STUD AGAIN NOTING
ANY DIFFERENCES IN VISUAL PERCEPTIONS FROM WHEN THE PART WAS ON THE
VEHICLE. CHECKING THE STUD AFTER REMOVAL HELPS IMPROVE CONSCIOUSNESS OF
ISSUES WHEN INSPECTING PARTS ON VEHICLE.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-9 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 5874
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5875
Tie Rod End: Specifications
Tie rod end lain nuts ............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end nut .................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 55 Nm (41 ft.
lbs.) Tie rod end castellated ................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 50 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end jam nut .................................
.................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm
(33 ft. lbs.) Inner tie rod end ................................................................................................................
...................................................................... 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Inner
Tie Rod End-Inner
Removal
1. Remove the steering gear.
2. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove both steering gear boots when removing the RH inner lie rod end.
Remove the boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
3. NOTE: LH side shown; RH side similar.
Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft.
4. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar.
Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie rod end.
5. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft while tightening.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner > Page 5878
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Outer
Tie Rod End-Outer
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Turn the ignition switch to the unlock position. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Remove the castellated nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the castellated nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end jam nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner > Page 5879
5. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end
6. Remove the tie rod end. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint Inspection-Front Suspension Lower Arm
Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play. 1. Raise and
support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm.
2. Grasp the upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot
center line. 3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while
the wheel is being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds
0.794 mm (1/32 inch).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection > Page 5886
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Control Arm: Service and Repair Front
Lower Arm
Removal
CAUTION: If the bolts have an epoxy adhesive path or other form of Loctite, they must be torqued
to the specification within 1 hour of initial installation.
CAUTION: Verify that the fastener and mating surfaces are clean of debris or rust, and if necessary
clean with a wire brush.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
3. Position a floor jack under the ball joint and raise the control arm until the vehicle starts to rise off
the hoist.
4. NOTE: The ride height is measured from the center of the half-shaft to the edge of the fender.
Record the ride height.
5. Remove the floor jack. 6. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
7. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 5891
8. Support the subframe.
9. Remove the lower arm.
1. Remove the lower arm bolts. 2. Remove the lower arm.
Installation
1. Install the lower arm bolts loosely. 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 5892
4. Remove the subframe support.
5. Position the screw jack under the ball joint and raise the ball joint until the previously recorded
ride height is achieved.
6. Tighten the lower arm bolts. 7. Remove the screw jack. 8. Install the wheel and tire.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 5893
Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear
Lower
Lower Arm
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut.
2. Separate the lower ball joint from the knuckle.
^ Remove the lower ball joint nut.
3. Remove the lower arm.
1. Remove the lower arm inner bolt. 2. Remove the lower arm.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Upper
Upper Arm
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 5894
2. Separate the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.
^ Remove the upper ball joint nut.
3. Remove the upper arm.
1. Remove the upper arm inner bolt. 2. Remove the upper arm.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle-4WD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5898
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed.
1. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
1. If necessary, remove the center cap. 2. Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5899
3. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
occur.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum. ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
4. If the brake drum will not come off, follow these steps.
1. Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw. 2. Loosen the brake shoe
adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
5. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
6. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5900
7. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
8. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
9. Remove the snap ring.
Vehicles with ABS
10. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5901
11. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
12. Remove brake line bracket bolt.
13. Support the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5902
15. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
16. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
17. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5903
18. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
19. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
20. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the bolts. 2. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle and position
aside.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5904
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam. 4. Install the wheel knuckle cam
bolt loosely.
5. NOTE: Brake shoes shown removed for clarity.
Install the brake backing plate into the wheel knuckle. ^
Install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5905
6. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub. 7. Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
9. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
10. Remove the support from the wheel knuckle.
11. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5906
12. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
13. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
14. Install brake line bracket bolt.
15. Install the parking brake cable bolt.
Vehicles with ABS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 5907
16. Position the ABS brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
17. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles
18. Install the halfshaft nut.
19. Install the brake drum. 20. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 21. Check and adjust the wheel
alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the stabilizer bar link.
1. Remove the upper and lower stabilizer bar link nuts. 2. Remove the stabilizer bar link.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the 2 front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the 2 engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5916
6. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (1 on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5917
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5918
15. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the 2 front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the 2 subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components.
21. CAUTION: When installing the subframe bolts, make sure that both of the subframe rear bolts
are fully engaged in the cage nuts before
tightening to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5922
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5923
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the 4 control arms bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair
Spring
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: After removing the wheel, finger-tighten one lug nut to retain the drum if the drum retainers
have been removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
Vehicles with ABS
3. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 4. Support the rear wheel knuckle.
5. Remove the upper arm bolt.
^ Loosen the lower arm bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5927
6. Remove the lower shock nut and position aside.
7. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring.
^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5936
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5937
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5943
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5944
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Unclip the brake hose from the bracket.
Vehicles with ABS
3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly.
1. Remove the bolt. 2. Position the bracket aside.
All vehicles
4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
1. Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 2. Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5947
5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 6. Mark the bearing plate outer studs.
Marking the studs will aid in the installation in restoring the caster/camber to its original settings.
7. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts.
Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^
Remove the nuts.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Align the front wheels to specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5948
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the strut and spring assembly.
2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal
injury.
Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress
the front coil spring.
3. Remove the strut piston rod nut.
4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5949
1. Remove the metal sheet plate. 2. Remove the upper strut mount. 3. Remove the thrust bearing
plate. 4. Remove the thrust bearing. 5. Remove the upper spring seat. 6. Remove the upper spring
seat isolator. 7. Remove the spring. 8. Remove the dust boot. 9. Remove the rubber bump stopper.
10. Remove the lower spring seat.
5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed.
NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring
assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened.
NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5950
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber
Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the upper shock absorber nut. 3. Raise and support the vehicle enough to relax the
suspension system.
4. Remove the shock absorber.
^ Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
^ Reprove the shock absorber.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing
Part 1 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5956
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5957
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5958
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5959
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5960
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint
stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5961
8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin.
11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5962
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing-4WD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5963
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5964
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS
6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5965
7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5966
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring.
^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5967
2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5968
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5969
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5970
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1. Install the bolt. 2. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS
13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 5971
15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and
adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING:
- Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause
the vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking Points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking Points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 5980
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning the
hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > System Information >
Description and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Wheels: Service and Repair
Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Bearing
Part 1 Of 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5992
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5993
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles
6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the pinch bolt and nut. 2. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5994
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5995
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5996
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1. Position the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts and nuts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Position and align the ball joint
stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5997
8. Install the ball joint pinch bolt and nut into the wheel knuckle.
Vehicles with ABS
9. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles
10. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1. Install the tie rod end nut. 2. Install a new cotter pin.
11. Install the wheel hub nut. 12. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5998
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Bearing-4WD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 5999
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6000
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS
6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1. Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts. 2. Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6001
7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6002
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation. Remove the spring.
^ Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt and nut.
1. Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch. 2. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1. Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6003
2. Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6004
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6005
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1. Align the wheel knuckle cam. 2. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6006
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1. Install the bolt. 2. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS
13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6007
15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18. Check and
adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel nuts (all wheels) .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6017
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The suction accumulator is mounted to the A/C accumulator bracket. The inlet tube of the suction
accumulator is connected to the A/C evaporator outlet tube. The outlet tube is connected to the A/C
manifold and tube assembly.
After entering the inlet of the suction accumulator, heavier oil-laden refrigerant contacts an
internally mounted dome (which serves as an umbrella) and drips down onto the bottom of the
canister.
- A small diameter oil bleed hole, in the bottom of the vapor return tube, allows the accumulated
heavier liquid refrigerant and oil mixture to re-enter the compressor suction line at a controlled rate.
- As the heavier mixture passes through the small diameter liquid bleed hole, it has a second
chance to vaporize and recirculate through the A/C compressor without causing compressor
damage due to slugging.
- A fine mesh screened filter fits tightly around the bottom of the vapor return tube to filter out
refrigerant system contaminant particles.
- A desiccant bag is mounted inside the canister to absorb any moisture which may be in the
refrigerant system.
- A fitting located on the top of the suction accumulator is used to attach the A/C cycling switch. A
long-travel Schrader-type valve stem core is installed in the fitting so that the A/C cycling switch
can be removed without discharging the A/C system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6022
Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair
SUCTION ACCUMULATOR
REMOVAL
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
3. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
4. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
5. Remove the two suction accumulator mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6023
6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the suction line from the A/C evaporator core.
7. Remove the suction accumulator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new suction accumulator with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost
VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - DEFROST
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6029
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Panel Vent
VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - PANEL VENT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6030
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Footwell Vent
VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - FOOTWELL VENT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Vacuum Control Motor - Defrost > Page 6031
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Vacuum Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet
VACUUM CONTROL MOTOR - OUTSIDE AIR INLET
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Instrument
Panel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Door Cable: Service and Repair
TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR CONTROL CABLE
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Lower the glove compartment door.
- Press the glove compartment release tabs inward while pulling downward on the glove
compartment.
3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable.
1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool.
2 Release the locking tab.
3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6035
4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Duct: Service and Repair
REAR FOOTWELL DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats.
2. Remove the utility compartment.
1 Remove the four plastic fasteners.
2 Remove the utility compartment.
- Disconnect the electrical connection.
3. Remove LH and RH front door scuff plates. 4. Remove LH and RH lower A-pillar panels.
5. Remove the LH foot rest. 6. Pull back the carpet to gain access to the rear floor vent.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
6039
7. Remove the wire harness pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the floor duct pin-type retainers and
remove the duct.
Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the screws and the retaining guides.
3. Remove the screws and remove the duct.
Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CENTER REGISTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the defroster duct.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
6040
2. Remove the screws from the front side of the instrument panel.
3. Remove the screw for the left vent duct.
4. Remove the screw for the right vent duct.
5. Remove the screws for the center vent duct and remove the vent duct.
Installation 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page
6049
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust > Page 6055
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6061
Blower Motor: Description and Operation
BLOWER MOTOR
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core housing where it is
mixed and distributed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor
BLOWER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim.
2. Remove the blower motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the washer screws.
3 Remove the blower motor and cover, lower the assembly from the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor > Page 6064
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor - Wheel
BLOWER MOTOR - WHEEL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the blower motor.
2. Remove the blower motor wheel retainer from the motor shaft, and remove the wheel.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Install a new blower wheel retainer.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6068
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6069
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6070
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6071
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6075
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6076
Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH RESISTOR
Blower Motor Switch Resistor
The four-speed operation of the blower motor is achieved through the blower motor switch resistor
and contains a thermal limiter which is used as a temperature protecting fuse. The assembly is
located on the passenger side on the evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
- Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Magnetic Clutch
Air gap between pulley and hub...........................................................................................................
....................................0.35-0.75 mm (0.014-0.029 in)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6087
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation
A/C COMPRESSOR AND CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
AIC Compressor And Clutch Assembly
NOTE:
- Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C
compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the
shaft seals are repairable.
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics:
- a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount
- displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches)
- A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the
shaft opening in the assembly.
- Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a
swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force.
- Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end
of the A/C compressor.
- The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C compressor.
- The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark
color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because
carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil.
The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics:
- It drives the compressor shaft.
- When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub
assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6088
- The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as
one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate.
- When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly
move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6089
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at three equally-spaced places between the clutch hub and the A/C
clutch pulley. 2. Remove the A/C clutch. Add or remove spacers between the A/C clutch and the
compressor shaft until clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6090
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6091
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6092
6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1
Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly
aligned during installation.
Install the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6093
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6094
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6098
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6099
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6100
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6101
6. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Remove the A/C clutch field coil. 1
Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
3. NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly
aligned during installation.
Install the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6102
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6103
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: Customer Interest A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6112
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6118
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6119
Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) COMPRESSOR SHAFT SEAL
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the disk and hub assembly from the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal felt from the nose of the A/C compressor.
3. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign
materials to enter the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6120
Clean the compressor nose area.
4. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal snap ring.
5. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal from the A/C compressor.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign
materials to enter the A/C compressor.
Clean the A/C compressor nose area.
2. Lubricate the shaft seal and special tool with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Place the
shaft seal on the special tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6121
3. Position the special tool, with the shaft seal, over the A/C compressor shaft.
4. Using the special tool, push the shaft seal onto the A/C compressor shaft until seated.
5. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal snap ring. 6. Carry out the A/C compressor external
leak test.
7. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal felt. 8. Install the disk and hub assembly.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6128
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6129
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor
operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
- during engine start-up
- wide open throttle (WOT)
- low engine idle conditions
- excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6130
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6131
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service and Repair
MANIFOLD AND TUBE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
2. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube to A/C condenser core air conditioning
line (peanut) fitting.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 6135
5. Position aside the speed control actuator assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the electrical harness pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the nuts.
6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Remove the RH splash shield.
8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
9. Disconnect the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 6136
10. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
NOTE: Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt.
11. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly through the bottom of the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
- Apply Pipe Sealant with Teflon (R) D8AZ-19554-A or equivalent meeting Ford specifications
WSK-M2G350-A2 and ESR-M18P7-A to the threads of the A/C manifold retaining bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
A/C CONDENSER CORE
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C condenser core has the following characteristics:
- It is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator.
- It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over the fins and tubes to extract heat
and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6140
Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection
A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to
the core tubes.
Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set 023-00046 to the test fittings on the
A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum
pump 023-R0163.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6141
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER CORE
REMOVAL
NOTE:
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
- If an A/C condenser core leak is suspected, the A/C condenser core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Remove the nuts from the two condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fittings.
4. Remove the screws and the A/C condenser core brackets.
5. NOTE: When removing the A/C condenser core, disconnect the two air conditioning line (peanut)
fittings from the A/C condenser core.
Remove the A/C condenser core.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new A/C condenser core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Control Assembly: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 6147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 6148
Control Assembly: Description and Operation
CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Climate Control Assembly
The climate control assembly has three system controls:
- The A/C heater function selector switch combines a vacuum selector valve with two electrical
switches to supply battery positive voltage (B+) to the A/C clutch circuit and the blower motor
control circuit.
- The temperature selection is accomplished through cable-controlled positioning of the
temperature blend door located in the heater core housing.
- The blower motor switch controls the blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the
heater blower motor switch resistor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly
CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the four screws and the climate control assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6151
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the temperature control switch knob.
3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable.
1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool.
2 Release the locking tab.
3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6152
4. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
5. Remove the temperature control switch.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Depress the tab and rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6153
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Function Selector Switch
FUNCTION SELECTOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Remove the function selector switch.
- Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the
function selector into the housing. Verify that
both locking tabs are secured.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6154
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly Illumination Bulbs
CLIMATE CONTROL ASSEMBLY ILLUMINATION BULBS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the illumination bulb(s) by turning a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation
SPRING LOCK COUPLING
Spring Lock Coupling
The spring lock coupling is a refrigerant line coupling held together by a garter spring inside a
circular cage.
- When the coupling is connected together, the flared end of the female fitting slips behind the
garter spring inside the cage of the male fitting.
- The garter spring and cage then prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the
cage.
- The O-ring seals are green in color and are made of a special material.
- Use only the green O-ring seals listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the spring lock
coupling.
- A plastic indicator ring is used on the spring lock couplings of the A/C evaporator core to indicate,
during vehicle assembly, that the coupling is connected. Once the coupling is connected, the
indicator ring is no longer necessary but will remain captive by the coupling near the cage opening.
- An A/C tube lock coupling clip may be used to secure the coupling but is not necessary.
AIR CONDITIONING LINE (PEANUT) FITTING
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6158
The air conditioning line (peanut) fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component.
- The male and female blocks of the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting are retained with a nut.
- An O-ring seal is installed around the tube on the male block.
- The female block is welded to the tube and is not adjustable.
- Support the female fittings with a wrench to prevent twisting of the tubes.
- The male block will pivot around the tube to allow for alignment with the female block during
assembly.
- When correctly assembled the male and female fittings should be flush.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling
SPRING LOCK COUPLING
Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool Set
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Discharging and Recovery.
2. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling clip.
3. Using the special tool, disengage the spring lock coupling fittings.
4. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in
refrigerant leaks.
Remove the O-ring seals with a non-metallic tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6161
5. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring;
this can cause axial scratches across
the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
Remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire.
CLEANING
1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8 inch diameter brazing rod.
2. Cut an abrasive pad from maroon colored 3M Scotch Brite(R) with the dimensions
corresponding to the coupling size.
3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
(R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting
Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
5. Roll the pad on the tool and install it in a variable speed motor drill.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6162
6. CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to
prevent axial scratches which may cause
future leaks.
Polish for one minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and free
of scratches or foreign material.
7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves
or scratches are still present, install a new component.
9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 300 mm (12 inch) length of natural fiber string.
- Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth.
10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth.
CONNECT
1. Install the A/C tube lock coupling spring.
2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or
equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6163
3. CAUTION: Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified
may result in intermittent leakage during
vehicle operation.
NOTE: Some connections may have two or three O-ring seals.
Install the O-ring seals. 1
Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the A/C tube lock coupling
spring snaps over the flared end of the female
fitting.
5. Install the A/C tube lock coupling clip.
6. Charge the system. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation And Charging.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6164
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Line (Peanut) Fitting
AIR CONDITIONING LINE (PEANUT) FITTING
DISCONNECT
1. Recover the refrigerant. Refer to Discharging and Recovery.
2. CAUTION: Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting.
Remove the nut from the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting.
3. Pull the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting apart.
4. CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal groove resulting in
refrigerant leaks.
Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool.
CONNECT
1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6165
2. CAUTION: Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified
may result in intermittent leakage during
vehicle operation.
Install the O-ring seal. 1
Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
4. NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush.
Assemble the male and female fittings together.
5. Charge the system. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation And Charging.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING
REMOVAL
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and
Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
3. Disconnect the refrigerant line spring lock couplings from the A/C evaporator core.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose.
5. Remove the evaporator core housing.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the
passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing.
- Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature
switch are correctly positioned.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
A/C EVAPORATOR CORE
A/C Evaporator Core
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C evaporator housing contains the A/C evaporator core. The A/C evaporator core is the
plate/fin type with a unique refrigerant flow path.
- A mixture of refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C
evaporator core inlet tube and is routed so it flows through the partitioned first four plate/fin
sections.
- The next four plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the other end
of the A/C evaporator core.
- The next five plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the bottom of
the A/C evaporator core.
- Refrigerant then continues through to the remaining five plate/fin sections and then moves out of
the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core outlet tube.
- This W-pass flow pattern transfers the flow of refrigerant and oil through the A/C evaporator core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6172
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
A/C EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to
the core tubes.
Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core from the A/C system.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter which will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the manifold gauge set 023-00046 to the test fittings on the
A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum
pump 023-R0163.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6173
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE
REMOVAL
NOTE:
- Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
component or damage to the suction accumulator.
- If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
- The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit.
1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator
core housing to the new evaporator core housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2
The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge
temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET
circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying
resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation
A/C EVAPORATOR CORE ORIFICE
AIC Evaporator Core Orifice
NOTE: Install a new A/C evaporator core orifice whenever a new A/C compressor is installed.
The A/C evaporator core orifice has the following characteristics:
- color-coded green
- an orifice diameter of 1.25 mm (0.052 inch)
- located in the condenser to evaporator line
- Changes the high-pressure liquid refrigerant into a low-pressure liquid
- filter screens located on the inlet and outlet ends of the orifice body
- The inlet filter screen acts as a strainer for the liquid refrigerant flowing through the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
- O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice prevent the high-pressure liquid refrigerant from
bypassing the A/C evaporator core orifice.
- Adjustment or repair cannot be made to the A/C evaporator core orifice. A new A/C evaporator
core orifice must be installed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6180
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR CORE ORIFICE
Specail Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube.
2. Engage the special tool onto the A/C evaporator core orifice.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6181
3. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
4. If the A/C evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken A/C
evaporator core orifice.
5. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the broken
A/C evaporator core orifice.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate and install the O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice.
- Use PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
2. Place the A/C evaporator core orifice into the special tool.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6182
3. Using the special tool, insert the A/C evaporator core orifice into the condenser to evaporator
line until seated.
4. Remove the special tool.
5. Connect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 6. Recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6191
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6192
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6198
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6199
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6200
Heater Core: Description and Operation
HEATER CORE
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6201
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
HEATER CORE
WARNING: Carbon monoxide gas is colorless, odorless and dangerous. If it is necessary to
operate the engine with the vehicle in a closed area such as a garage, always use an exhaust
collector to vent the exhaust gases outside the closed area. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater
core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the Plugged
Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection
by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and
appear as a leak in the heater core.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: The heater core inlet hose will become too hot to handle if the system is working
correctly.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: -
the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged, or
- the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core pressure
tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter with hose
clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the heater
core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6202
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes.
Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure tester
to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6203
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument
Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Heater Core Case: Description and Operation
HEATER CORE HOUSING
The heater core housing contains the following components:
- heater core
- air temperature control door
- panel air flow control door
- defrost/floor air flow control door
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6207
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE HOUSING
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. If equipped with A/C, remove the A/C evaporator core housing.
5. Remove the heater core housing.
1 Remove the heater core housing retaining nuts.
2 Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6216
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6217
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6223
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6224
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6225
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
HEATER HOSE
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6226
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Description and Operation
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation
A/C COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
An A/C compressor pressure relief valve is incorporated in the compressor A/C manifold and tube
to:
- relieve unusually high refrigerant system discharge pressure buildups of (3,792 kPa [550 psi] and
above).
- prevent damage to the A/C compressor and other system components.
- avoid total refrigerant loss by closing after the excessive pressure has been relieved.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6230
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
REMOVAL
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the RH splash shield.
4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
5. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
If equipped with the 3.0L (4V) engine, remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt and
disconnect the A/C manifold and tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6231
6. NOTE: Vehicles with the 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with the 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
Remove the A/C compressor pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT LINES
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6235
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER TO EVAPORATOR LINE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5.
Remove the front bumper cover.
6. CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core and
remove the condenser to evaporator line.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity ............................................................................................................................
............................................................... 2 lb (907 g)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 6240
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ Specification
R134a Refrigerant YN-19 ....................................................................................................................
...................................................... WSH-M17B19-A
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTION
Refrigerant Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions included
with leak detector for handling and operation techniques.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6243
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection
TRACER DYE LEAK DETECTION
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6244
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6245
7. NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has
a one-way check valve that will prevent system refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Remove the dye injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure
DISCHARGING AND RECOVERY
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant.
2. NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6248
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
IDENTIFYING REFRIGERANTS
Refrigerant Identifier With Air-Radicator
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly
from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
- A green "PASS" light emitting diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
- A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
- A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6249
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
HANDLING OF CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANTS
1. CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern.
3. NOTE:
- Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
- The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
Remove the suction accumulator/drier.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Refrigerant Discharging and Recovery Procedure > Page 6250
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Evacuation and Charging
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) SYSTEM EVACUATION AND CHARGING
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant.
2. NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging
station is not available, system charging may be accomplished using a separate vacuum pump,
charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port
valves.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil Capacity ......................................................................................................................
............................................................. 9 oz (266 ml)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 6255
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item ......................................................................................................................................................
............................................................ Specification
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C)
...................................................................................................................................................
WSH-M1C231-B
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6256
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDING
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device. If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
- If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container
- Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6257
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
- installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
- installation of a new refrigerant line
- repair of an O-ring seal leak
- repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6262
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6265
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C
Pressure Cut-Off Switch
A/C CYCLING SWITCH
AIC Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
- This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C
cycling switch.
- The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
- The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C
clutch field coil.
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
- The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
- This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
- When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
- When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6268
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6269
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input.
When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the
specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable
Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff.
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6270
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR
A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart
Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure
(discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage
signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM
uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch > Page 6271
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for
all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure
from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6274
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6279
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6280
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6281
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6282
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6286
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6287
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the battery junction box (BJB). The power control module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C compressor
operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
- during engine start-up
- wide open throttle (WOT)
- low engine idle conditions
- excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6288
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6289
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
- Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 1
A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance Chart, Part 2
The air conditioning evaporative temperature (ACET) sensor senses evaporator air discharge
temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with
temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and
increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET
circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance affects the
voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying
resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects.
The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improving defrost/demist
performance, reduce A/C clutch cycling, etc.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6301
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6304
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off
Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation A/C Cycling Switch and A/C
Pressure Cut-Off Switch
A/C CYCLING SWITCH
AIC Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
- This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the A/C
cycling switch.
- The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
- The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
powertrain control module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the A/C
clutch field coil.
- When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
- The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
- This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C PRESSURE CUT-OFF SWITCH
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
- A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
- It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
- The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
- When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control.
- When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off
Switch > Page 6307
- When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off
Switch > Page 6308
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING CYCLING SWITCH
The air conditioning (A/C) cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input.
When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM will turn off the A/C clutch. For information on the
specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
The A/C cycling switch (ACCS) circuit to the PCM provides a voltage signal which indicates when
the A/C is requested. When the A/C demand switch is turned on, and both the A/C cycling switch
and the high pressure contacts of the A/C high pressure switch (if equipped and in circuit) are
closed, voltage is supplied to the ACCS circuit at the PCM. Refer to the applicable
Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring.
If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate.
For additional information, refer to PCM outputs, wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff.
NOTE: Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C
is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off
Switch > Page 6309
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
AIR CONDITIONING PRESSURE SENSOR
A/C Pressure Sensor Output Voltage Vs. Pressure Chart
Typical Air Conditioning Pressure Sensor
The air conditioning pressure (A/C pressure) sensor (Figure 26) is located in the high pressure
(discharge) side of the air conditioning A/C system. The A/C pressure sensor provides a voltage
signal to the powertrain control module (PCM) that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM
uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Cycling Switch and A/C Pressure Cut-Off
Switch > Page 6310
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning High Pressure
Switch
AIR CONDITIONING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high
pressure switch is either dual function for two-speed electric fan applications or single function for
all others.
For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a
predetermined A/C pressure. This will result in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure
from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve.
For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C
pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM will then turn on the high
speed fan to help reduce the pressure.
For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning or Vehicle/Diagrams.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CYCLING SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6313
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
PRESSURE CUTOFF SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Service Port HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6317
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6318
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
GAUGE PORT VALVES
The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line.
The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component.
- Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side gauge ports.
- The Schrader-type valve core can be repaired if the seal leaks.
- Always install the A/C charging valve cap on gauge port valves after repairing the refrigerant
system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair
VACUUM HOSE REPAIR
Vacuum Tester
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of
standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than
the damaged area of the
mini-tube vacuum hose.
3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area.
4. WARNING: Read the warning information on the product label. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
Dip the mini-tube hose ends in commercially available paint thinner containing methyl ethyl ketone
(MEK). This solvent will seal the mini-tube in the vacuum hose.
5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (0.375 inch) into the ends of
the standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) service vacuum
hose section.
6. Shake the service joint after assembly to make sure the O-ring seal solvent is dispersed and the
vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum leak in the repair area.
- Use the Vacuum Tester or equivalent.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle
repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control
module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new
deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried
out.
Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry
out the OCS System Reset procedure as
instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system
removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following
procedures for the specified system:
- For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails.
- For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting
points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat
mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6327
SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6328
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION
1. WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt
height adjusters, if so equipped, child safety seat tether attachments, and attaching hardware
should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced unless a qualified
technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate correctly. Belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must
be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6335
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6336
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6337
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6338
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6339
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6340
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 6345
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 6346
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Unit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Unit > Page 6349
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Air Bag Unit > Page 6350
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
6351
Air Bag: Description and Operation
AIR BAG MODULE - DRIVER
NOTE: References to the driver air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air
bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
The driver air bag module: is steering wheel mounted.
- will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM).
- has no subassemblies.
- is serviced with the steering wheel as an assembly.
AIR BAG MODULE - DRIVER SIDE
NOTE: References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
- When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats for additional
information.
The driver side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the driver
side crash sensor.
- is installed as an assembly.
- is mounted in the driver seat back.
AIR BAG MODULE - PASSENGER
NOTE: References to the passenger air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted
air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
The passenger air bag module: has no separately repairable parts and is installed as an assembly.
- is mounted in the RH side of the instrument panel.
AIR BAG MODULE - PASSENGER SIDE
NOTE: References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
- When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The passenger side air bag module: will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the
passenger side crash sensor.
- is installed as an assembly.
- is mounted in the passenger seat back.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
6352
Air Bag: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your
body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce
the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a
product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap
and water afterwards.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be installed new, not
repainted.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
2. NOTE: The driver air bag module and steering wheel must be serviced as an assembly. These
components are not serviced separately
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal of the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Repower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6356
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6357
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6358
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE
The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
- monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs)
- signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side
Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6366
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation
CLOCKSPRING
The clockspring:
- is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.
- provides a continuous electrical path between the restraints control module (RCM) and the driver
air bag module.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 6371
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right > Page 6374
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6377
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
- The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system
operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6378
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6381
procedure again.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar,
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6382
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6383
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6384
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim
panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6385
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for
proper system operation.
Install the side crash sensor. 1
Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6386
3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6387
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6388
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6389
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of
the steering column.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable.
21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6390
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6391
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6392
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Side Air Bag: Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6399
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right > Page 6402
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6407
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6408
Air Bag Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6409
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE
The restraints control module (RCM) carries out the following functions: signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
- monitors the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) for faults
- illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
- flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the lamp fault code (LFC) detected
- communicates through the data link connector (DLC) the current or historical diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs)
- signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - "J" Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/ Side
Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Missing Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Repair -
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Repair - Stripped Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Impact
Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6420
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6421
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6422
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6423
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6424
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6425
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and
attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced
unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
- It is important that the bolt/anchor be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise, the child's
safety seat may not be properly secured, and the child can be injured in case of a sudden stop or
accident.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6430
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation
ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Child safety seat tether anchors are manufactured into the vehicle. See the owners manual for
locations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6431
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ANCHOR
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
1. At the roof, near the rear liftgate door, remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover.
2. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
INSTALLATION
1. WARNING: It is important that the bolt/anchor be securely tightened to specification. Otherwise,
the child's safety seat may not be
properly secured, and the child can be injured in case of a sudden stop or accident.
NOTE: Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity.
- Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
Seat Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Seat Belt: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6438
Seat Belt: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing, as the webbing may weaken.
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and
attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced
unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This
will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from
your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet)
away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed,
hearing protection is required.
- Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing
down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6439
Seat Belt: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT, LAP/SHOULDER - DUAL LOCKING MODE
WARNING: Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the front seat.
The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two
ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode.
1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on
hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and
rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains
locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is
buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight
lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat.
3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the
retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard
passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SAFETY BELT - CENTER, REAR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
1. Remove the safety belt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6442
Seat Belt: Service and Repair General Procedures
Safety Belt Cleaning
SAFETY BELT CLEANING
1. WARNING: Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing, as the webbing may weaken.
Clean the safety belt webbing only with a mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery
or carpets. Follow the instructions provided with the soap.
Safety Belt With Anchor Plate Thread Damage
SAFETY BELT WITH ANCHOR PLATE THREAD DAMAGE
1. Remove the broken or stripped bolt and discard. 2. Drill out the internal threads in the safety belt
anchor plate with a 10.7 mm (27/64 in) drill. 3. Rethread the anchor plate with a 1/2-13 tap (seat
belt). 4. Clean out the chips. 5. Install the attachment parts. Original parts are to be replaced with
the repair parts indicated in the Safety Belt Parts Replacement Guidelines. 6. When repairing a
multiple belt and attachment, install the nut to the bolt in the tunnel area from the underside of the
floorpan.
Safety Belt Tongue Rotated on Belt
SAFETY BELT TONGUE ROTATED ON BELT
1. Fold the safety belt as indicated.
2. Pull the safety belt tongue over the fold in the safety belt.
Deployed
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - DEPLOYED
1. WARNING: The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle
and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never
probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6443
Inoperative
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE
WARNING:
- The safety belt pretensioner is pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
personal injury.
- Carry a live safety belt retractor pretensioner or safety belt buckle pretensioner so as to keep
fingers and clothing away from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and
safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt
buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from
the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company.
Scrapped Vehicle
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE
REMOTE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This
will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from
your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet)
away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed,
hearing protection is required.
- Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing
down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6444
5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Buckle: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly
pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors
on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether attachments, and
attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies should be replaced
unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and operate properly. Belt
assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6449
Seat Belt Buckle: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6450
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY - FRONT
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly
pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors
on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6453
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
3. NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is
similar.
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. Pull out to release the retaining clips.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
5. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut.
Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury.
Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1
Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6454
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
- The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6455
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
Install the affected seat into the vehicle.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6456
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Center and Passenger Side, Rear
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - CENTER AND PASSENGER SIDE, REAR
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to repositioning the seat.
- Make sure that the safety belt buckles are accessible after repositioning the seat.
- Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6457
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Driver Side, Rear
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - DRIVER SIDE, REAR
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat.
- Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat.
- Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 6458
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6462
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT EXTENSION
A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. The safety belt
extension is available. This assembly will add approximately 20 cm (8 inches) to the length of the
safety belt. Use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short when fully extended. Do
not use the safety belt extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt
extensions are available at no cost from any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service Precautions
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Lower the height adjuster.
3. Remove the upper height adjuster bolt. 4. Raise the height adjuster.
5. Remove the height adjuster.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the height adjuster.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
- Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure that the front safety belt retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
- Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new
retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6471
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures
SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER WITH STRIPPED WELD NUTS
D-Ring Installation Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the trim panels.
2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to
drill out the damaged threads in the upper
B-pillar structure.
3. NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out
any chips before proceeding.
Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14x1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) and tap new threads.
4. Use a threaded insert provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent
and screw it into the retapped hole until it is slightly
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6472
below the surface of the hole.
5. NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer
to Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster to install
the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat shoulder strap adjuster bolts are stripped, replace
the adjuster.
Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) several times to drive down the insert keys.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6473
D-Ring Installation Kit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
BELT MINDER
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
BELT MINDER
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Seat Belt Retractor: Service Precautions
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front Safety Belt Retractor
FRONT SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6485
4. Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor.
2 Remove the front safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
- Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the
automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
- Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new
retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6486
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Retractor
REAR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: All safety belt assemblies including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle support
assemblies (slide bar), shoulder belt height adjusters (if so equipped), child safety seat tether
attachments, and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. All belt assemblies
should be replaced unless a qualified technician finds the assemblies show no damage and
operate properly. Belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side is similar.
Vehicles with rear power point
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both rear safety belt retractors
2. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Remove the rear door scuff plate
3. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6487
4. NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Pivot the seat cushion forward.
5. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
6. NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity.
From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and
remove it.
7. Remove the rear safety belt guide.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6488
2 Remove the safety belt guide. If necessary, remove the spacer from the rear safety belt guide.
8. Lower the second row seat backrest.
9. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on
the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced.
10. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
- Pull up to release the relaining clips.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
11. Remove the cargo cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6489
12. Remove the cargo cover hold-down.
RH side only
13. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
LH side only
14. Pull out to release the retaining clips and separate the rear quarter trim panel.
15. Disconnect the power point connector, if equipped and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
Both rear safety belt retractors
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6490
16. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
Both rear safety belt retractors
1. Install the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
LH side only
2. Position the rear quarter trim panel and connect the power point electrical connector.
Both retractors
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6491
3. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Install the quarter trim panel. 1
Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening.
2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
4. Install the cargo cover hold-down.
5. Install the cargo cover.
Both rear safety belt retractors
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6492
6. Install the rear hatch scuff plate.
7. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping.
8. Make sure the spacer is installed onto the rear safety belt guide bolt.
9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Install the rear safety belt guide. 1
Position the safety belt guide.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
10. NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a
new cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6493
Install the rear safety belt guide cover.
11. Raise the second row seat backrest.
12. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Install the safety belt anchor. 1
Position the safety belt anchor.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
13. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping.
14. Install the rear door scuff plate.
1 Position the rear door scuff plate.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6494
2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Close the cover.
15. Position the seat cushion down.
Vehicles with a rear power point
16. Connect the battery ground cable.
All vehicles
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic
locking retractor (ALR) mode.
2 Carry out the emergency locking retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the new
retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6495
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat > Page 6500
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Tensioner: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly
pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors
on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
pretensioner or air bag deployment and could result in personal injury.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from
your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet)
away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed,
hearing protection is required.
- Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing
down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6503
Seat Belt Tensioner: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Active
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY - FRONT
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6506
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air
Bag System
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER
As part of the supplemental restraint system (SRS), the safety belt buckles are equipped with
pretensioners. The safety belt buckle pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt
webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the restraints control module (RCM) when the module
detects a crash event force exceeding a programmed unit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when servicing an air bag-equipped vehicle and when handling a belt and buckle assembly
pretensioner. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Never probe the connectors
on a pyrotechnic device. Doing so could result in belt and buckle assembly pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6509
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
3. NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is
similar.
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. Pull out to release the retaining clips.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
5. NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut.
Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result in personal injury.
Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner. 1
Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6510
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
- The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6511
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
Install the affected seat into the vehicle.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6512
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair General Procedures
Deployed
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - DEPLOYED
1. WARNING: The safety belt pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device. Always wear safety glasses
when repairing an air bag equipped vehicle
and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner. Never
probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in pretensioner or air bag
deployment and could result in personal injury.
Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
Inoperative
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE
WARNING:
- The safety belt pretensioner is pyrotechnic devices. Always wear safety glasses when repairing
an air bag equipped vehicle and when handling a safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner. Never probe a pretensioner electrical connector. Doing so could result in
personal injury.
- Carry a live safety belt retractor pretensioner or safety belt buckle pretensioner so as to keep
fingers and clothing away from moveable parts. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and
safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt
buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from
the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company.
Scrapped Vehicle
SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER DISPOSAL - UNDEPLOYED, INOPERATIVE
REMOTE DEPLOYMENT
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module or safety belt retractor/pretensioner assembly. This
will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover or deployment door pointed away from
your body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
- Remote deployment is to be performed outdoors with all personnel at least 6.1 meters (20 feet)
away to ensure personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when the air bag is deployed,
hearing protection is required.
- Do not place the driver or passenger air bag module with the trim cover or deployment door facing
down, as the forces of the deploying air bag could cause it to ricochet and cause personal injury.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6513
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt
pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6514
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 6520
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Right
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 6523
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6526
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
- The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for proper system
operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 6527
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
SENSORS
WARNING: The restraints control module (RCM) orientation is critical for correct system operation.
If a vehicle equipped with an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) has been involved in a
collision in which the center tunnel area has been damaged, inspect the mounting and bracket for
deformation. If damaged, the RCM must be replaced whether or not the air bags have deployed. In
addition, make sure the area of the RCM mounting is restored to its original condition.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - DRIVER SIDE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6530
procedure again.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar,
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6531
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6532
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6533
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Remove the B-pillar trim
panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6534
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterwards.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. WARNING: The tightening torque of the air bag side crash sensor retaining bolts is critical for
proper system operation.
Install the side crash sensor. 1
Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
2. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6535
3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6536
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6537
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6538
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top of
the steering column.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable.
21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6539
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - "J" NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, restraints control
module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
- The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-S190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal.
4. NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
Install the crash sensor.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - MISSING WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
NOTE:
- There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, restraints control module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
- Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
- Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6540
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WELD NUT REPAIR - STRIPPED WELD NUT, RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) AND
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply
must be depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near
the front or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers,
seats and hood latches.
Please refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag
sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6541
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6548
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6554
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6555
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6556
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair
ANTENNA UPPER CABLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Remove the right lower A-pillar trim.
3. Disconnect the antenna cable connector.
4. Lower the glove box door.
5. Remove the three pin-type retainers holding the lead-in cable.
6. Remove the antenna cable clip fastened to the center instrument panel support.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6562
7. Remove the cable through the glove box opening.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle
Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6570
Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the tilt wheel lever down in open position, as
necessary.
3. Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
1 Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the transceiver assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the transceiver assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a
new PATS transceiver.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6574
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6580
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 6581
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE: All remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via remote
transmitter, keyless entry keypad (if equipped) or door
lock control switch while the driver door is open.
2. Turn the key from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If
the module has successfully entered program
mode, it will lock and then unlock all doors.
3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then
unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed. Repeat this step for each remote transmitter.
4. If the door locks do not respond for any remote transmitter, wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond,
refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of remote
transmitters are attempted to be programmed.
5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last remote transmitter
was programmed.
- The maximum number of remote transmitters have been programmed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6597
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page
6603
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6604
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6605
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6606
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6615
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6616
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6617
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6618
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6624
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6625
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6626
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6627
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6628
View 151-38
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6631
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6632
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6633
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6634
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6638
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6639
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 6648
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 >
Page 6654
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6655
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6665
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6666
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6667
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6668
Speaker: Diagrams Tweeter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6669
Speaker: Description and Operation
SPEAKERS
All vehicles are equipped with four radio speakers mounted in the doors. The optional tweeters are
mounted in the sail panels and the optional woofer is mounted in the right rear quarter panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker
DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panels.
2. Remove the speakers.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 6672
Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker Enclosure - Subwoofer
SPEAKER ENCLOSURE - SUBWOOFER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the subwoofer enclosure.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6678
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6679
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6680
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page
6695
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743 > Page 6701
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6702
View 151-28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6703
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6704
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6709
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6718
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6719
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6720
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 6721
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6727
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6728
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6729
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 6730
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6731
View 151-38
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6734
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6735
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 6736
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6737
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6741
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6742
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements
TSB 06-7-1
04/17/06
NEUTRAL TOW CAPABILITY - SERVICE KIT REQUIREMENTS
FORD: 2004-2006 Focus 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2006 Escape,
Explorer, F-150-350 Series, Ranger 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2007 Explorer Sport Trac
LINCOLN: 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 06-4-5 to update the vehicle neutral tow application chart.
ISSUE Various vehicles are neutral tow capable. Refer to the following chart to determine neutral
tow capability for specific vehicle applications, and to determine if a Service Kit is required to make
the vehicle neutral tow capable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 6748
ACTION Review the neutral tow application chart (Figure 1) and order the kit, if applicable.
Reprogramming of various modules may be required for some installations. Installation instructions
are included with the kit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Vehicle - Tow Capability/Service Kit Requirements > Page 6749
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6754
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6755
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6756
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6757
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6758
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6759
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6760
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6761
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6762
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6763
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6764
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6765
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6766
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6767
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6768
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6769
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6770
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6771
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6772
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6773
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6774
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6779
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6780
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6781
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6782
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6783
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6784
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6785
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6786
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6787
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6788
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6789
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6790
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6791
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6792
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6793
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6794
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6795
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6796
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6797
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6798
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1 Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
- Connections
- Circuity
- Relays
- Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6801
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6802
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Tests AB
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test AB1
Tests AC
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AC1-AC2
Tests AD
PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER
TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6803
LAMPS
Test AD1
Tests AE
PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - LH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AE1
Tests AF
PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - PARKING LAMPS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6804
Test AF1
Test AF1-AF2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6805
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6810
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6811
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6812
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6813
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6814
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6815
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6816
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6817
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6818
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6819
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6820
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6821
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6822
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6823
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6824
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6825
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6826
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6827
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6828
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6829
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6830
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6838
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6839
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6840
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6841
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6842
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6843
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6844
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6845
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6846
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6847
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6848
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6849
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6850
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6851
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6852
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6853
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6854
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6855
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6856
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6857
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6858
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6859
59-2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6860
59-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 6861
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 6862
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Information Bus (Module Configuration).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the six pin-type retainers (three each side).
3. Remove the four front bumper cover bolts (two each side).
4. Remove and discard the two front bumper cover-to-front fender pin-type retainers (one each
side). 5. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
6. Remove the lower front bumper cover bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6868
7. Remove the pin-type retainers.
8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the two upper bolts (one each side) and the front bumper cover.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, be sure to position the front bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the front bumper.
1 Remove the four front bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the front bumper.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system electrical connector.
2. Remove the six rear splash shield bolts (three each side).
3. Remove the two rear bumper cover to rear quarter panel screws (one each side).
4. Remove the four pin-type retainers.
5. Remove the rear bumper cover.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the bolts and the liftgate alignment bumpers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Page 6876
3 Remove the rear bumper cover.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, be sure to position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear bumper cover.
2. Remove the rear bumper.
1 Remove the four rear bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the rear bumper.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Loosen the door latch remote control screw.
4. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing.
5. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle.
6. Remove the exterior door handle seals.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6891
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
- Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT DOOR
LH and RH sides
NOTE: Make sure the rear door is within specification before making any adjustments to the front
door. Refer to the specification chart. See: Specifications
1. Remove the fender.
2. Mark the positions of the front door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the two front door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainer.
2 Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
LH side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6898
5. Position the central junction box (CJB) aside.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Position the CJB aside.
RH side
6. Position the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bracket aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the bracket aside.
LH and RH sides
7. Loosen the lower door hinge bolt just enough to permit movement.
8. Adjust the front door to specification.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6899
9. Tighten the three front door hinge to body bolts.
LH side
10. Install the CJB.
1 Position the CJB.
2 Install the nuts.
RH side
11. Install the IFS bracket.
1 Position the bracket.
2 Install the bolts.
LH and RH sides
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6900
12. Install the A-pillar lower trim panel.
1 Position the A-pillar lower trim panel.
2 Install the pin-type retainers.
13. Install the fender.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exterior front door handle.
2. Loosen the screw until the door latch remote control is sliding free.
3. Position the interior door handle aside.
- Pull to release the clip.
4. Remove and discard the door latch screws.
5. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6904
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the door latch assembly.
- Slide the door latch remote control towards the front of the vehicle.
7. Remove the three screws and position the anti-theft guard aside.
8. Open the clip and disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 9. Disconnect the
lock/unlock rod clip.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Transfer components as necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
3. Remove the door handle cup screw.
4. Remove the front door trim panel.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front door trim panel and disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the
door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the
screws.
8. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6914
9. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 6919
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 6922
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6926
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the rear door glass top run aside.
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6932
6. Remove the exterior door handle screws.
7. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing.
8. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle.
9. Remove the exterior door handle seals.
10. Remove the door latch remote control from inside the door frame.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
- Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - REAR DOOR
1. Remove the front seat safety belt retractor.
2. Mark the positions of the rear door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Loosen the two rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
5. Adjust the rear door to specification.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 6939
6. Tighten the four rear door hinge-to-body bolts. 7. Check the front door adjustments. 8. Install the
front seat safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the door glass top run aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6943
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
6. Remove and discard the rear door latch screws. 7. Remove the rear door latch.
8. Disconnect the interior door handle cable.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
2. Remove the door handle cup screw.
3. Remove the rear door sail panel.
4. Remove the rear door trim panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6947
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and
fits tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown, the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6957
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6958
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Remove the hood latch bolts.
3. Remove the hood latch.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
3 Remove the hood latch.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6963
1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit.
1 Connect the cable.
2 Engage the cable conduit.
2. Position the hood latch with alignment marks and install the bolts.
3. Install the hood latch nut. 4. Verify the hood alignment.
5. Adjust the hood latch.
1 Loosen the bolts.
2 Loosen the nut.
3 Align the hood latch with the hood latch striker.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6964
6. Tighten the hood latch bolts and nut.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch. Repeat previous steps as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch release handle bolts. 2. Remove the hood latch.
3. Remove the two hood latch release handle cable locators.
4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle cable must be pulled through the dash panel into the
passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 6972
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6977
1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6981
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS RELEASE HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear window wiper motor.
2. Remove the nuts, striker plate and the liftgate window glass release handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6993
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6994
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6995
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6996
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6997
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6998
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 6999
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7000
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7001
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04
> Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7011
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7012
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7013
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7014
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7015
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7016
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7017
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7018
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 >
Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page 7019
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: >
NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release
Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
LIFTGATE LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
4. Remove and discard the liftgate latch bolts. 5. Remove the liftgate latch.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE:
- Make sure the liftgate latch release rod is not preloading the latch. It should be clipped in a
relaxed state with no slack.
- Position the liftgate latch release rod by pushing outboard to remove the slack.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7026
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch Remote Control
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOTE CONTROL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch remote control actuating rods.
1 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate window latch actuating rod.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the liftgate latch actuating rod.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
1 If equipped, disconnect the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector.
2 Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator.
4. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly.
- Remove the screw and nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7027
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate window Latch
LIFTGATE WINDOW LATCH
REMOVAL
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch.
1 Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
2 Open the clip and disconnect the actuating rod.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the nuts.
Remove the liftgate window latch. 1
Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the latch.
INSTALLATION
1. Position the liftgate window latch and loosely install the bolts. 2. Adjust the liftgate window latch.
- Set the liftgate window glass flushness to 1.5 mm (0.06 in) under flush.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 7028
3. Tighten the liftgate window latch bolts.
4. Connect the liftgate window latch.
1 Connect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
2 Connect the actuating rod and close the clip.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE LATCH ACTUATOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control.
2. Remove the screws and the liftgate latch actuator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the fender splash shield screws.
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the 2 front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the 2 engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7046
6. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (1 on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7047
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the 2 steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7048
15. Remove the 2 bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the 2 front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the 2 subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components.
21. CAUTION: When installing the subframe bolts, make sure that both of the subframe rear bolts
are fully engaged in the cage nuts before
tightening to specification.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7052
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7053
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the 4 control arms bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
RADIATOR GRILLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the two nuts.
3. Release the nine clips and remove the radiator grille.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Console - Floor
Console: Description and Operation Console - Floor
CONSOLE - FLOOR
The high series floor console consists of the following components:
- arm rest
- floor console finish panel
- rear cup holders
- storage compartment
The low series floor console consists of the following components:
- floor console front finish panel
- floor console rear finish panel
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Console - Floor > Page 7062
Console: Description and Operation Console - Overhead
CONSOLE - OVERHEAD
The overhead console may consist of the following components:
- garage door opener compartment
- lamp switch
- roof opening panel control switch (with roof opening panel)
- sunglass compartment(s)
- center dome lamp/map lamps
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series
Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - High Series
FLOOR CONSOLE - HIGH SERIES
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console front bolts.
3. Remove the floor console.
1 Remove the two rear bolts.
2 Remove the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7065
Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - Low Series
FLOOR CONSOLE - LOW SERIES
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console front finish panel.
1 Remove the manual transmission shifter knob by turning counterclockwise.
2 Remove the floor console front finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console front bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7066
4. Remove the floor console.
- Remove the rear two bolts and the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7073
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7074
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7075
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7076
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7077
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7078
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
TSB 05-8-3
05/02/05
HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH
FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch
perimeter edge.
ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1).
2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the
back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel.
3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to
the back side of the headliner (Figure 2).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch >
Page 7087
4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or
wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the
adhesive to cure for 45 minutes.
5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With
51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near
Rear Hatch
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sagging Near Rear Hatch
TSB 05-8-3
05/02/05
HEADLINER SAGGING NEAR REAR HATCH
FORD: 2004-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2005 vehicles may exhibit the headliner sagging around the rear hatch
perimeter edge.
ACTION Adhere the headliner to the underside of the roof panel. Refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the perimeter seal near the sagging edge (Figure 1).
2. Without removing the headliner push pins, pull the headliner down far enough to scuff/sand the
back side of the headliner and the underside of the roof panel.
3. Prepare the cartridge of Motorcraft Plastic Bonding Adhesive (TA-9), and apply the adhesive to
the back side of the headliner (Figure 2).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 05-8-3 > May > 05 > Interior - Headliner Sagging Near
Rear Hatch > Page 7093
4. Push the headliner back into its proper position. Clamp in place using a flat piece of metal or
wood to keep the headliner flush against the underside of the roof panel (Figure 3). Allow the
adhesive to cure for 45 minutes.
5. Remove clamps and reinstall the perimeter seal.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050803A 2004-2005 Escape/Escape 0.3 Hr.
Hybrid/Mariner Adhere The Headliner To The Underside Of The Roof Panel (Do Not Use With
51916A, 51916B, 51916BXH)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 34
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7094
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINER
REMOVAL
Vehicles with overhead console
1. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7095
4. Remove the four passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the eight bolts.
2 Remove the four passenger assist handles.
5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening
panel moulding.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7096
9. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-Ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the two safety belt D-ring covers.
10. Remove the two safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips
aside.
12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels.
14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7097
15. Remove the front interior lamp lens.
16. Remove the front interior lamp.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front interior lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
17. Remove the rear interior lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
18. Remove the five pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7098
19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers.
20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the
headliner.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7103
5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7104
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt.
3. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 4. Position the liftgate
weatherstrip aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7105
5. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
6. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
1 Insert a tape-wrapped screwdriver between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim panel.
2 Push the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
7. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position.
Remove the exterior front door latch.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7116
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7117
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE: All remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
1. The vehicle must be electronically unlocked before entering program mode (via remote
transmitter, keyless entry keypad (if equipped) or door
lock control switch while the driver door is open.
2. Turn the key from OFF to RUN 8 times within 10 seconds, with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If
the module has successfully entered program
mode, it will lock and then unlock all doors.
3. Within 20 seconds, press any button on a remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then
unlock to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed. Repeat this step for each remote transmitter.
4. If the door locks do not respond for any remote transmitter, wait several seconds and press the
button again. If the door locks still fail to respond,
refer to Inspection and Verification. Make sure that no more than the maximum number of remote
transmitters are attempted to be programmed.
5. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position.
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last remote transmitter
was programmed.
- The maximum number of remote transmitters have been programmed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-35
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 7130
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component
Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7138
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7141
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7144
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7145
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7146
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7147
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7152
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7153
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7154
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7155
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain
Article No. 04-9-6
BODY - PAINT - IRON PARTICLE REMOVAL - INDUSTRIAL FALLOUT - ACID RAIN
NEUTRALIZATION
FORD: 2004-2005 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS,
THUNDERBIRD
2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2005 FIVE HUNDRED, FORD GT 2004-2005 ECONOLINE,
ESCAPE, EXCURSION, EXPEDITION,EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER, F SUPER DUTY,
FREESTAR, RANGER, F SERIES, F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2004-2005 LS, TOWN CAR, AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2004-2005 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
2005 MONTEGO 2004-2005 MONTEREY, MOUNTAINEER 2005 MARINER
This article supersedes TSB 99-12-10 to update the vehicle lines, model years and service
procedure.
ISSUE
Ford Motor Company has released a private labeled material to be used for iron particle/acid rain
service repairs.
ACTION
To remove these particles/contaminates, use ONLY the following Motorcraft products and
procedure. No polishing, compounding, color sanding, or repainting should be done before this
procedure is performed. This procedure uses products that are acidic, alkaline, and neutral and
must be properly mixed and used in their specific order. Refer to the following Service Procedure
for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE ANY CHANGES TO THIS PROCEDURE WILL CAUSE AN INCOMPLETE OR
UNSATISFACTORY REPAIR. THE USE OF ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR PROCEDURE MAY
CAUSE DAMAGE TO ALUMINUM OR PAINTED SURFACES.
NOTE THE PRODUCTS USED TO REMOVE SURFACE CONTAMINATION FROM PAINT ARE
DESIGNED FOR VEHICLES, WHICH HAVE EXPERIENCED EXPOSURE FOR LESS THAN 120
DAYS. VEHICLES THAT EXCEED 120 DAYS OF EXPOSURE MAY REQUIRE THE
PROCEDURE BE REPEATED TO RESOLVE THE CONCERN. ONCE THIS PROCEDURE IS
COMPLETED, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO PERFORM POLISHING OR REFINISHING
PROCEDURES AFTER VEHICLE INSPECTION.
IDENTIFICATION
Ferrous metal particles (hot iron dust) are generated by manufacturing facilities, rail shipments, etc.
Moisture and heat combine with particles to create a chemical reaction. This reaction creates an
acid, causing the iron to corrode and etch into the paint surface. Additionally, industrial fallout and
acid rain generate corrosive compounds that fall on the vehicle's painted surfaces. When subjected
to moisture and temperature, chemical compounds are created that etch the paint surface. To
assist in identifying surface contamination, use a (Tandy-Radio Shack #63-851) 30x lighted
magnifier.
CONCERN DESCRIPTION
Ferrous Metal
- Light Colored Vehicles: Small orange stains the size of "mechanical pencil lead." The surface is
rough to the touch.
- Dark Colored Vehicles: Small white or silver appearing dots with a rainbow ring around the dot.
The surface is rough to the touch.
Industrial Fallout
- Water spots containing ferrous metal are present and the surface is rough to the touch.
Acid Rain/Etching
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Repair Due To Iron Particles/Acid Rain > Page 7161
- Surface will exhibit irregular discolored spotting.
- Dark colored vehicles may exhibit cloudy or graying spots where the acid has begun to etch the
paint.
- Extreme cases of etching may be felt.
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE
Use Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer, Alkaline Neutralizer, and Detail Wash to decontaminate and
neutralize the paint surface. Perform the procedure only on vehicle when the paint surface
temperature is cool. Follow the step-by-step procedure listed below to perform this service
operation.
1. Rinse off dust, dirt, and debris with cold water. Flush liberally. 2. Prepare Motorcraft Acid
Neutralizer by mixing eight (8) parts of water to one (1) part Acid Neutralizer in a bucket. 3. Wear
gloves and use a clean wash mitt to apply mixture of Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer to the entire
vehicle starting at the top of the vehicle
working toward the side. Work fast and keep the vehicle wet with solution, lightly agitating and
moving quickly around the vehicle repeatedly for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with
severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes.
NOTE USE A SEPARATE MITT FOR EACH PRODUCT. DO NOT INTERMIX MITTS.
4. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water to remove Motorcraft Acid Neutralizer. 5. Dry only
the horizontal surfaces of the vehicle at this time. Do not dry glass.
NOTE MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER IS READY TO USE. DO NOT MIX WITH
WATER. DO NOT SPRAY MOTORCRAFT ALKALINE NEUTRALIZER ON THE PAINTED
SURFACE.
6. Pour the Alkaline Neutralizer into a dispenser (squirt bottle). Squirt the neutralizer directly onto a
clean wash mitt. Apply the product to the
vehicle, keeping the areas wet and lightly agitated for five to seven (5-7) minutes. For vehicles with
severe conditions, work the product for up to eight (8) minutes.
7. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with cold water. 8. Prepare Motorcraft Detail Wash by mixing 29.5
mL (1 ounce) of Detail Wash to 3.7 L (1 gallon) of water. 9. Shampoo the vehicle with Motorcraft
Detail Wash using a clean wash mitt. Rinse the vehicle with cold water and dry the vehicle
completely.
SURFACE CORRECTION FOLLOWING DECONTAMINATION/NEUTRALIZATION
1. Visually inspect paint surface for evidence of removal of ferrous metal particles and water spots.
NOTE ACID RAIN DISCOLORING OR ETCHING WILL REQUIRE ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES
DEPENDENT ON DEPTH OF DAMAGE; POLISHING, BUFFING, COLOR SANDING, OR IN
EXTREME CASES, REFINISHING.
2. DO NOT intermix buffing products. Use only one manufacturer's products. 3. Always follow the
manufacturer's product usage sequence. Use the appropriate recommended pad at recommended
buffing speeds as specified by
the product manufacturer.
NOTE WHEN ATTEMPTING TO AFFECT A REPAIR BY BUFFING, POLISHING, OR COLOR
SANDING, DO NOT REMOVE AN EXCESS OF 0.3 MIL OF PAINT FILM OR REFINISHING WILL
BE REQUIRED. USE OF AN ELECTRONIC MIL GAUGE (ROTUNDA 164-R4025) IS HIGHLY
RECOMMENDED TO INSURE CONTROL OF PAINT FILM REMOVAL.
4. Use a dual action sander with a Velcro backing plate and foam pad to fine polish and remove
any swirls created by a rotary buffer or pad. 5. Use an alcohol and water mixture (1 to 1 ratio) to
clean the buffed areas and to verify removal of scratches and swirls before application of the
final polish.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes
Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes
The Vehicle Certification Label (VC) is located on the left-hand front door jamb.
The first set of numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of
numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code.
- BZ Chrome Yellow
- C2 Gold Ash Metallic
- CX Dark Shadow Gray (clearcoat)
- DV Light Tundra
- FX Merlot
- G2 Redfire
- L2 True Blue Pearl (clearcoat)
- P5 Aspen Green Metallic
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 7164
- TL Satin Silver (clearcoat)
- UA Ebony (clearcoat)
- YZ Oxford White (clearcoat)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 7165
Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE
The VC label is located on the left-hand front door or door jamb and is in a similar location on
trucks.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7177
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 7180
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7181
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7182
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7183
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7187
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7188
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the roof opening panel module.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7194
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7195
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Close the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the headliner.
3. Remove the roof opening panel motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the roof opening panel motor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The roof opening panel should be in the closed position.
Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
2. Install the roof opening panel motor.
1 Position the roof opening panel motor.
2 Install the bolts.
3. Check for correct operation of the roof opening panel motor. 4. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 7201
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
AIR DEFLECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Open the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the roof opening panel frame.
3. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the air deflector retaining tabs when releasing the air
deflector from the roof opening.
Remove the air deflector. Release the air deflector retaining tab from the roof opening.
- Lift up the air deflector and slide the air deflector to the rear to release the air deflector arms.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Front
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT DRAIN HOSE
REMOVAL
Passenger side
1. Remove the instrument panel.
All
2. Remove the headliner.
3. Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose at the front body pillar.
4. Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose.
1 Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose.
- Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel front drain hose.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 7209
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Rear
ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
3. Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
1 Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
- Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel drain hose.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRAME
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the in-line electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the four roof opening panel drain hoses.
4. Release the wire harness locators.
5. Remove the roof opening panel frame.
1 Remove the eight roof opening panel frame bolts.
2 Remove the roof opening panel frame.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7213
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7217
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7218
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the roof opening panel module.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Seat Height Motor
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Seat Height Motor > Page 7224
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7227
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7228
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7232
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7233
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7234
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7235
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7236
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7237
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Seat
Driver Seat
FRONT SEAT CUSHION - DRIVER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7242
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in the side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
- Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7243
6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7244
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7245
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track-to-floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the driver seat. 1
Remove the seat track-to-floor bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7246
2 Remove the driver seat.
- If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 24. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated
grid electrical connectors.
25. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7247
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag-to-floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated grid
electrical connectors.
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7248
Install the driver seat. 1
Position the driver seat.
2 Install the seat track-to-floor bolts.
- If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector.
5. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 6. Position the driver seat
forward.
7. Install the seat track-to-floor nuts. 8. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
10. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7249
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 13. Connect the battery ground
cable. 14. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 15.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7250
17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
19. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7251
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
21. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 22. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7252
25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Connect the battery ground cable. 27.
Prove out the air bag system.
Passenger Seat
FRONT SEAT CUSHION - PASSENGER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7253
- To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7254
5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7255
9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7256
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7257
21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the passenger seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
22. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 23. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat
cushion heated grid electrical connector from the seat wiring harness.
24. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7258
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat cushion
heated grid electrical connector to the seat wiring harness.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7259
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the passenger seat. 1
Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector.
5. Position the passenger seat forward.
6. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7260
8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
9. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery
ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7261
13. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 14. Disconnect the
battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
15. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
16. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7262
18. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
19. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
20. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
21. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7263
22. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
23. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
25. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7264
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat
REAR SEAT CUSHION
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: 60% split bench seat shown, 40% and bench seat similar.
1. Lift up the rear seat cushion.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Pull up on release lever and slide the seat out of the floor bracket.
3. Release the J-retainer.
4. Unzip the rear seat cushion trim.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7265
5. Remove the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad.
6. Remove the rear seat cushion bracket.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Remove the rear seat cushion bracket.
ASSEMBLY
1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7270
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7271
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7272
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7273
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7274
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7275
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7276
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7277
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7278
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7279
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7280
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7281
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7282
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7283
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7284
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7285
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7286
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7287
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7288
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7289
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7290
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7291
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7292
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations >
Driver Side Front
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations >
Driver Side Front > Page 7297
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Side Front > Page 7300
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7301
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7302
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7303
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Side
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Side > Page 7308
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side > Page 7311
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7312
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7313
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Latch: Service and Repair
REAR SEAT BACKREST LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear seat backrest.
2. Remove the rear seat backrest side trim panel.
3. Remove the rear seat backrest latch.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the latch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat
Seat Track: Service and Repair Driver Seat
SEAT TRACK - DRIVER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7321
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
- Manual seat track shown, power seat track similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7322
6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7323
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to
the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7324
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the driver seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7325
2 Remove the driver seat.
- If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. If equipped, remove the seat height adjustment control.
24. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- If equipped with a power/heated seat, disconnect the electrical connector(s).
25. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
26. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7326
27. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for
installation.
Remove the front seat backrest. 1
Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
28. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
29. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector from
the seat wiring harness.
30. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7327
31. If equipped with manual seats, remove the seat adjuster.
- Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
32. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the seat track. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7328
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
2. If equipped with manual seats, install the seat adjuster.
- Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7329
4. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector to the
seat wiring harness.
5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
6. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
7. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7330
8. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
9. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
- If equipped with a power/heated seat, connect the electrical connector.
1 Install the shield.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
10. If equipped, install the seat height adjustment control.
11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the driver seat. 1
Position the driver seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7331
- If equipped with power seat, connect the electrical connector.
12. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 13. Position the driver seat
forward.
14. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 15. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7332
18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
19. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 20. Connect the battery ground
cable. 21. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 22.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7333
24. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
26. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
27. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7334
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
28. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 29. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
30. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
31. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
32. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 33. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7335
34. Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7336
Seat Track: Service and Repair Passenger Seat
SEAT TRACK - PASSENGER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7337
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7338
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7339
10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7340
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the passenger seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7341
22. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
24. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
25. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for
installation.
Remove the front seat backrest. 1
Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7342
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
26. If equipped, remove the under seat storage bin.
27. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 28. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector.
29. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
30. Remove the seat adjuster.
- Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7343
31. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
Remove the safety belt pretensioner. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7344
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Install the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
2. Install the seat adjuster.
- Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
4. Install the front seat cushion and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector.
5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7345
6. If equipped, install the under seat storage bin.
7. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
8. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connectors.
9. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector.
1 Install the shield.
2 Install the screw.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7346
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the passenger seat. 1
Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat connector.
12. Position the passenger seat forward.
13. Install the seat track to floor nuts.
Vehicles with side air bag
14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7347
15. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 18. Connect the battery
ground cable. 19. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 20.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7348
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
22. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
24. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7349
25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
26. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
27. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
28. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7350
29. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 30. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
31. Connect the battery ground cable. 32. Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7356
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7361
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7364
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7367
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7368
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7369
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch > Page 7370
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7374
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7375
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7376
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7377
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7381
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7382
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7383
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7384
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7385
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7386
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Side
View 151-36
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 7391
View 151-37
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 7394
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7395
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat installed
in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in the side
air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7396
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 7402
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation
INSULATION
Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. Insulation is installed:
- under the roof panel.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- on the cowl sides.
- over the front and rear floor areas.
- in the A, B, and D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arms.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7416
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch > Page 7419
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 7422
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for
vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive
voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is
depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal
position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor
profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal
inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code
P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 7423
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page
7427
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Locations > Page
7428
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7432
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7433
Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Squeeze the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
3. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
4. Remove the speed control actuator assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Separate the wire harness from the bracket.
3 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7434
5. Remove the bolts and separate the speed control actuator from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL CABLE
REMOVAL
Vehicles equipped with 2.0L Zetec engine
1. Disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket.
Vehicles equipped with 3.0L (4V) engine
2. Disconnect the speed Control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket.
1 Disconnect the cable from the throttle control linkage.
2 Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the bracket
All vehicles
3. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Depress the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 7438
4. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7442
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away
from your body. In the unlikely event of
an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the steering wheel cover.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7443
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7449
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7452
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position Switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position Switch > Page 7455
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Applied/Brake
Deactivator Switch
BRAKE PRESSURE APPLIED/BRAKE DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
The brake pressure applied (BPA) switch also sometimes called the brake deactivator switch for
vehicle speed control deactivation. Is a normally closed switch, which supplies battery positive
voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is NOT applied. When the brake pedal is
depressed, the normally closed switch will open and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed BPA switch along with the normally open brake pedal
position (BPP) switch are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor
profile learn function can be disable if a brake switch failure occurs. If one or both brake pedal
inputs to the PCM did not change states when they were expected to a diagnostic trouble code
P1572 can be set by the PCM strategy.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7456
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
- Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7460
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7461
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The clutch pedal position (CPP) switch (Figure 30) is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch
pedal position. The PCM provides a 5-volt reference (VREF) signal to the CPP switch. If the CPP
switch is closed, indicating the clutch pedal is engaged, the output voltage (5 volts) from the PCM
is grounded through the signal return line to the PCM, and there is 1 volt or less. One volt or less
indicates there is a reduced load on the engine. If the CPP switch is open, meaning the clutch
pedal is disengaged, the input on the CPP signal to the PCM will be approximately 5 volts. Then,
the 5-volt signal input at the PCM will indicate a load on the engine. The PCM uses the load
information in mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7465
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. WARNING: When carrying a live air bag, make sure the bag and trim cover are pointed away
from your body. In the unlikely event of
an accidental deployment, the bag will then deploy with minimal chance of injury. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the steering wheel cover.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7466
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7472
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7473
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7474
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7475
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7476
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7477
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7478
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7479
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7480
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7481
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7482
Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7483
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7484
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7485
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7486
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7487
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7488
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7489
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7490
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7491
Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
66-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7492
66-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7493
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning Chime
The safety belt warning chime alerts that the safety belt is not fastened. The safety belt chime will
sound for six seconds when the driver safety belt is not fastened and the ignition switch is turned
from the OFF to the RUN or START position. The safety belt warning chime will stop when the
safety belt is fastened, when the ignition is switched to the OFF position or if the six second timer
expires.
The safety belt warning chime inputs are: ignition switch position
- driver safety belt switch
Belt Minder
The belt minder feature is configurable. To configure without using a diagnostic tool, refer to Belt
Minder Deactivating/Activating.
The belt minder feature supplements the current safety belt warning function. The belt minder
feature is enabled after the current safety belt warning is complete. The belt minder reminds the
driver that their safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the
safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster once the vehicle speed has exceeded three mph.
While activated, the belt minder alternates the chime and indicator from ON for 6 seconds to OFF
for 30 seconds.
The belt minder feature stops when: the driver safety belt is buckled.
- the ignition is turned to OFF or ACC.
- five minutes have elapsed since belt minder has started.
Headlamp On Warning Chime
The headlamp on warning chime sounds if the parking lamps or the headlamps are left on after the
key has been removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder and any door is opened.
The warning chime will stop when any of the above conditions are removed.
The headlamp on warning chime inputs are: ignition switch
- parking lamp relay
Key In Ignition Warning
The warning sounds if the key is left in the ignition switch lock cylinder when any door is opened
and the ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position.
The warning chime will stop when any of the above conditions are removed.
The key in ignition warning chime inputs are: key-in-ignition warning switch
- door ajar switch(es)
Air Bag Warning Chime
The air bag warning chime is activated when the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and an
active fault is detected by the restraint control module (RCM). The RCM sends a chime request to
the instrument cluster when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
Trip/Odometer Reset Tone
A single tone sounds when the trip/odometer reset button is pressed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Warning Indicator: Specifications
Rear anti-lock brake sensor bolt
..............................................................................................................................................................
9 Nm (80 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7521
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7522
44-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7529
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7530
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7531
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7532
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7533
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7534
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7538
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7539
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7540
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7546
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
FUEL CAP OFF INDICATOR LAMP
The Fuel Cap Off Indicator Lamp (FCIL) is an output signal that is controlled by the PCM and will
illuminate when the strategy determines that there is a failure in the vapor management system
due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed properly. This would be detected by the inability to pull
vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event.
NOTE: The Escape, Freestar/Monterey, Mustang, Thunderbird, Town Car, Lincoln LS6/LS8,
Expedition and Navigator do not have a dedicated (separate) output wire from the PCM to the
instrument cluster. The PCM commands the FCIL on and off through the BUS +/- circuits (SCP).
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 7553
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 7554
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 7555
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel
pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies
fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump
continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet
maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the
bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial
fill.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be deactivated and
restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7562
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in
possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7563
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module electrical
connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
5. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION PROCEDURES
There are two deactivation and reactivation procedures.
- One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
- The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair process.
This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a seat
equipped with a seat side air bag.
Deactivation Procedure
WARNING: If the supplemental restraint system (SRS) is being serviced, the system must be
deactivated and restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed.
The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag modules
reconnected when the system is reactivated to avoid
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7564
non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
- After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
- The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position.
2. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing
or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such as
doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Reactivation Procedure
1. WARNING: The air bag restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed and the air bag
modules reconnected when the system is
reactivated to avoid non-deployment in a collision, resulting in possible personal injury.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the restraints control module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy.
3. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
6. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7565
7. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical connector.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7566
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
AIR BAG RECONNECT CHECKLIST
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern: 1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3.
Restraints control module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors
connected? 5. All sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7567
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
PROVE OUT PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bulbs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb > Page 7572
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb
WARNING INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the desired miniature bulb by turning it a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting
straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Ford provides no information related to a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the powertrain control
module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom
Charts
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Ford provides no information related to a Oil Change Reminder Lamp for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7585
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7586
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 >
Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Customer Interest Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC
C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist Warning Indicator: > 06-20-5 >
Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7595
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator:
> 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist System - Speaker
Inop./DTC C1742/C1743
TSB 06-20-5
10/16/06
PARKING AID SPEAKER INOPERATIVE - DTCS C1742 AND C1743
FORD: 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2004-2006 Escape, Expedition, Explorer, F-150
2004-2007 F-250, F-350
MERCURY: 2005-2007 Montego 2004-2006 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2004-2007 vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS)
may experience low or no audible sound due to speaker issues related to the RSS. The speaker is
attached to the module which may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) C1742 (Rear Sounder
Circuit Fault) and/or C1743 (Rear Sounder Short).
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify that DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present. Also, low audible or intermittent audible
warning condition may exist as well.
2. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 are present, replace parking aid speaker on module with speaker
in Speaker Kit. Follow instructions in Speaker Kit.
3. Clear DTCs and repeat check for DTCs C1742 and/or C1743.
4. If DTCs C1742 and/or C1743 go away and speaker sounds, the repair is complete.
5. If DTCs remain, follow normal diagnostics in the appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 413-13
Pinpoint Test F.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
062005A 2004-2006 Expedition: 1.2 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2007 Super Duty 0.6 Hr.
250/350: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With
31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Warning Indicator:
> 06-20-5 > Oct > 06 > Parking Assist System - Speaker Inop./DTC C1742/C1743 > Page 7601
062005A 2004-2005 1.1 Hrs.
Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not
Use With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2006 Explorer/Mountaineer: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR,
31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 F-150: Replace 0.5 Hr.
Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR, 31012AL,
31012AT)
062005A 2004-2006 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
2005-2006 Mariner: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Five 1.3 Hrs.
Hundred/Montego: Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use
With 31012AR, 31012AL, 31012AT)
062005A 2005-2007 Freestyle: 0.7 Hr.
Replace Parking Aid Speaker, Includes Time To Access Module (Do Not Use With 31012AR
31012AL, 31012AT)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K864 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7602
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7606
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7607
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
BELT MINDER
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
SAFETY BELT WARNING SYSTEM
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
- If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
BELT MINDER
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7618
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7619
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7620
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7626
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel Pump Module
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7630
Fuel Pump Module (For Returnable Fuel Systems)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7631
Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7632
Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump Module (FPM)
The fuel pump (FP) module (Figure 71),(Figure 72) and(Figure 73) is a device that contains the fuel
pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies
fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump
continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet
maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the
bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial
fill.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7636
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7637
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > System
Information > Description and Operation
Tire Monitoring System: Description and Operation
Ford provides no information regarding a Tire Pressure Monitoring System for this vehicle.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP
The transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) is an output signal from the PCM that controls the
lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Refer to
Transmission Control Switch in Hardware PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7654
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7659
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7660
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7661
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7662
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7663
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7664
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7665
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7666
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7667
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7668
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7669
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7670
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7671
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7672
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7673
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7674
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7675
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7676
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7677
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7678
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7679
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7680
90-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the stoplamps.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause
for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step. 4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and proceed to the Symptom
Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7683
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7684
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test J
PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test J1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7685
Test J1-J3
Test K
PINPOINT TEST K: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7686
Test K1-K2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7687
Test K2 Continued
Test L
PINPOINT TEST L: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Test L1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7688
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7692
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7693
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7694
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7698
Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair
CARGO LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the headliner.
3. Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp assembly.
- Remove and discard the screws and washers.
2. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp bulb holder from the lamp assembly by disengaging the
snaps.
3. Remove the bulb(s).
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7707
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7708
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7709
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7710
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7711
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7712
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7713
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7714
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7715
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7716
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7717
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7718
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7719
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7720
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7721
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7722
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7723
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7724
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7725
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7726
Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7727
Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
89-1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7728
89-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7729
Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Interior Lighting
The generic electronic module (GEM) supplies voltage and ground to the interior courtesy lamps
when any of the following inputs are received: any door becomes ajar
- liftgate or liftgate glass becomes ajar
- remote keyless entry unlock signal is received
- a key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK
All interior courtesy lamps are turned off when any of the following occurs: all the doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed
- the ignition switch is turned to RUN
- a key cylinder switch is turned to LOCK
- remote keyless entry lock signal is received
The illuminated entry feature is another feature which activates the interior lamps. This feature
operates as follows:
The GEM illuminates the interior lamps at 80 percent brightness when an unlock signal is received
from a remote keyless entry transmitter, key cylinder switch, or door handle lifted when locked. If
no door ajar signal is received the GEM will time out and turn the interior lights off. The illuminated
entry feature will be canceled when any of the following conditions are met: the remote transmitter lock button is pressed and the courtesy lamp control is not activated.
- the ignition is in the RUN or START position and the interior lamp control is not activated.
Battery Saver
The GEM is equipped with a battery saver which will turn the lights off after 45 minutes of inactivity.
This feature is an internal function of the GEM software.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause
for an observed of reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step. 4. If the diagnostic tool does not power up, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5.
Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Information Bus
(Module Communications Network).
- NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for GEM, Refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control
Module).
- SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, proceed to the Symptom Chart to continue
diagnostics. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
8. If the DTCs are retrieved that are not found in the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index,
refer to the master GEM Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Index in Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Body
and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7732
DTC Index B1317 - B1571
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7733
Courtesy Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart, Part 1
Symptom Chart, Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7734
Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test A
PINPOINT TEST A: THE INTERIOR LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test A1-A3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7735
Test A3-A5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7736
Test A5-A6
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7737
Test A7-A8
Test B
PINPOINT TEST B: THE INTERIOR LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY - DO NOT FADE OUT
Test B1-B2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7738
Test B2-B4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7739
Test B5-B7
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7740
Test B8-B11
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7741
Test B11-B13
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7742
Test B14-B16
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7743
Test B17-B19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7744
Test B20-B22
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7745
Test B23-B26
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7746
Test B26-B28
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7747
Test B29-B31
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7748
Test B32-B34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7749
Test B35-B36
Test C
PINPOINT TEST C: THE INTERIOR LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7750
Test C1-C3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7751
Test C3-C4
Test D
PINPOINT TEST D: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
Test D1-D2
Test E
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7752
PINPOINT TEST E: THE DEMAND LIGHTING IS INOPERATIVE
Test E1-E4
Test F
PINPOINT TEST F: BATTERY VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7753
Test F1-F3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7754
Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair
INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens.
3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
7755
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7760
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7761
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7765
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7766
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7767
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7771
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7772
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7773
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Page 7779
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
WARNING: The halogen fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before new bulb is
installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance.
Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn
on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7787
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7791
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7792
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7793
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7797
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7798
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7803
Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7807
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7808
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP BULB
REMOVAL
WARNING: The halogen headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
1. NOTE: Make sure that the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
Disconnect the headlamp electrical connector.
2. Remove the rubber boot.
3. Depress the retainer clip and position aside.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7813
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information >
Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7820
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7821
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7822
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7826
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7827
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 7828
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7833
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7834
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7835
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7846
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7847
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7848
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7849
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7850
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7851
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7852
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7853
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7854
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7855
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7856
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7857
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7858
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7859
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7860
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7861
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7862
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7863
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7864
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7865
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7866
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7867
Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7868
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the license plate lamp assembly.
- Push the license lamp to the right and pull out.
2. Disconnect the socket from the lens.
- Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair
Map Light: Service and Repair
INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens.
3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7880
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7881
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 7882
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 7887
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 7888
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7892
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7893
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 7894
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Exterior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Exterior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7901
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7902
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7903
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7910
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7911
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7912
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7916
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7917
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7918
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7925
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7926
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7927
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7934
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7938
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7939
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Typical Brake Pedal Position Switch
The brake pedal position (BPP) switch (Figure 27) is used by the PCM to disengage the
transmission torque converter clutch and on some applications as an input to the idle speed control
for idle quality and for vehicle speed control deactivation. Depending on the vehicle application the
BPP switch can be connected to the PCM in the following manner:
- BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle
brake is applied.
- BPP switch is hard wired to a module (ABS, LCM or HEM), BPP signal is than broadcasted over
the data link to be received by the PCM.
- BPP switch is hard wired to the anti-lock brake (ABS)- traction control / stability assist module.
The stability module will interpret the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generate
an output called the Driver Brake Application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is than sent to the PCM
and to other BPP signal users.
Note on applications where the BPP switch is hard wired to the PCM and stoplamp circuit, if all
stoplamp bulbs are burned out (open), high voltage is present at the PCM due to a pull-up resistor
in the PCM. This provides fail-safe operation in the event the circuit to the stoplamp bulbs has
failed.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7940
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 7946
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7950
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7951
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7955
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7956
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel rearward from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7960
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7961
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7962
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
4. Remove the multifunction switch.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7973
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7974
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7975
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7976
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7977
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7978
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7979
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7980
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7981
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7982
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7983
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7984
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7985
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7986
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7987
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7988
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7989
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7990
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7991
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7992
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See:
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7993
Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7994
Tail Lamp: Service and Repair
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Pull straight back to remove the rear lamp assembly.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 7999
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8000
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8001
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8002
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8003
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8004
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8005
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8006
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8007
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8008
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8009
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8010
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8011
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8012
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8013
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8014
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8015
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8016
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8017
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8018
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location
Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1 Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
- Connections
- Circuity
- Relays
- Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8021
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8022
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Tests AB
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test AB1
Tests AC
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AC1-AC2
Tests AD
PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER
TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8023
LAMPS
Test AD1
Tests AE
PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - LH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AE1
Tests AF
PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - PARKING LAMPS
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8024
Test AF1
Test AF1-AF2
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
8025
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8030
Turn Signal Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
3. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1. Remove the screws. 2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
4. Remove the multifunction switch.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the multifunction switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 8042
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8048
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8049
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8050
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8054
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8055
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8060
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8061
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8062
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8067
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8068
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8073
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8074
View 151-35
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8077
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8078
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8081
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8082
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8083
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8084
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8085
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8086
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8087
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Locations > Left Front > Page 8094
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8097
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8102
View 151-34
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8103
View 151-35
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8106
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8107
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8110
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8111
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8112
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8113
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8114
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8115
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 8116
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run
Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run
FRONT DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the door glass top run bolts.
4. Remove the door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8121
Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run
REAR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window regulator.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the down position.
3. Remove the screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the rear door interior glass weatherstrip.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8122
5. Remove the rear door exterior belt line moulding.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolts.
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the
door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the
screws.
8. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8127
9. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8131
1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses
and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. NOTE:
- Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
- Locating tabs need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new
quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating tabs.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass.
3. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing time at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours. (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary.) Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive will adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8135
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. CAUTION: Use caution when applying Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413. Apply a light
amount of primer. Too much primer will run
and damage the painted surface.
Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Medal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry.
4. Clean the inside of the quarter glass surface with alcohol-free cleaner, making sure the ceramic
coated area is clean.
5. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
Apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around
the glass surface to urethaned.
6. Apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B to the same area
that was prepped in the previous step. Allow five
minutes to dry.
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
8. NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating
tabs on the glass surface.
Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B.
Start at the bottom and work around to the sides of the quarter window glass.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8136
9. Install the quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. After the quarter window glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed. 11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the
quarter window glass. 12. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8144
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8148
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8149
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses
and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
2. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8153
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
3. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings.
4. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect electrical connector.
5. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the sun visors and clips.
6. Remove the driver and passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 8.
Lower the front portion of the headliner. 9. Remove the cowl grille.
10. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8154
11. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top
center and work toward the bottom corners.
12. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body.
13. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass.
14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8155
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the
pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry.
4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the
windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an alcohol-free
cleaner making sure the ceramic coated area is clean.
6. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford
specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around the glass surface to be urethaned.
7. If installing a new windshield, apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G314-B to the same area that was prepped in
the pervious step. Allow five minutes to dry.
8. Apply foam dam meeting Ford specification EBS-M3G137-A to the bottom of the windshield
glass.
9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8156
10. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B
to the sides and top of the windshield glass.
11. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G316-B
to the bottom of the windshield glass outside the
foam dam.
12. Install the windshield glass aligning it to the marks previously made. 13. After the windshield
glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 14. If necessary,
remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the windshield glass. 15. Install the
cowl grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
17. Install the overhead console.
1 Position the overhead console. If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
2 Install the screws.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8157
18. Install the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Position the sun visors and clips.
2 Install the six screws.
19. Install the interior rear view mirror.
20. Install the two windshield side garnish mouldings.
21. Install the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Position the two assist handles.
2 Install the four bolts.
3 Close the four assist handle covers.
22. Install the driver and passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8170
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8171
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8172
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8173
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
WASHER HOSE REPAIR
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a
windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Rear Window Washer Pump Motor
View 151-16
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Rear Window Washer Pump Motor > Page 8181
View 151-16
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8182
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the windshield washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent component damage.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8188
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump
REAR WINDOW WASHER PUMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the windshield washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8189
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1
Remove the bolts.
2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Disconnect the hoses.
3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1
Remove the bolts.
2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Disconnect the hoses.
3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8200
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front
WIPER PIVOT ARM - FRONT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm nut.
2. Remove the windshield wiper pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front > Page 8203
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear
WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arm.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8208
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Application and
ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic Electronic
Module (GEM)
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Wiper Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8217
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Use an Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to test the wiper motor on the
vehicle.
To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the
windshield wiper motor; refer to Wiper Pivot Arm-Front or Wiper Pivot Arm-Rear.
Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from (2) Alternator, Regulator, Battery and
Starter Tester (ARBST) to the battery negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from ARBST to
the wiper motor (4) common brush terminal (terminal 3).
Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6)
low-speed brush terminal (terminal 4) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor.
Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7)
high-speed brush terminal (terminal 5) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top vent panels.
2. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
3. Remove the windshield wiper motor.
1 Remove the bolt and windshield wiper motor linkage.
2 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts.
3 Remove the windshield wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8220
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. 4. Open the liftgate.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8221
5. Remove the rear wiper motor plastic cover.
6. Remove rear wiper motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the bolt.
4 Remove the rear wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Refer to Windshield Wiper Motor.
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8228
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8229
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape Awd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L VIN 1 (2004))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8230